UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 AT LOS ANGELES
 
 Putnam's Correspondence 
 Handbook 
 
 A Work of Reference 
 
 Designed to 
 
 Promote Efficiency 
 
 in 
 
 Business Correspondence 
 
 By 
 Eleanora Banks 
 
 G. P. Putnam's Sons 
 
 New York and London 
 Gbe fmfcfterbocfter press 
 
 1915
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1912, BY 
 
 ELEANORA BANKS 
 
 (Under the title Correct Business and Legal Forms) 
 
 Second Edition, with New Material 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1914, BY 
 
 ELEANORA BANKS 
 
 TEbe fmfckerbocfeer press, Hew Borft
 
 " It clotK breed great perfection \v-Hen tHe prac- 
 tice is Hardier tHan. tHe vise." Bacon. 
 
 PREFACE 
 
 The preparation of this book is to be attributed to 
 the difficulties that I met during my first years of 
 
 office work in obtaining proper forms for various 
 documents and in finding the thousand and one bits 
 of information necessary to correct and efficient work. 
 Had such a collection as this been available during my 
 earlier experience I could have saved much time and 
 
 m avoided many mistakes. I well remember one book of 
 
 o instructions that I bought eagerly and hopefully. It 
 was entitled A Book of Business Letters, and contained 
 models of letters on various subjects for the guidance 
 of the unsophisticated. . One of the letters commenced 
 
 g. thus: 
 
 "Mess. Page & Co., 
 
 Boston, Mass. 
 Gents : 
 The complimentary close in all of the letters had each 
 
 j word capitalized: "Yours Very Truly." Another of 
 
 ,3 the letters was addressed to "Jackson & Sharp M'f'g. 
 
 B) Co., Trenton, N. J. Messrs: " The business schools 
 teach much more now than in former years, yet much 
 that is essential is left untaught. Therefore, I believe 
 that this book will be generally useful. It is the 
 outgrowth of years of endeavor to gather and 
 condense into convenient form for daily use the 
 information most needed in correspondence and 
 generally to be found only by rambling and time- 
 consuming searches through many books. As time 
 
 428977
 
 iv Preface 
 
 is of prime importance in business, the advantage 
 of immediate and easy reference is obvious. And 
 an occasional reference to authorities cannot be 
 avoided even by the most expert; for knowledge is 
 uncertain and memory confused at times of extreme 
 haste and it is always at times of extreme haste that 
 the particular reference-book needed is some distance 
 away or wholly inaccessible. 
 
 Much of the material contained in this volume has 
 been adapted from the following authorities, by per- 
 mission of the publishers, for which permission grateful 
 acknowledgment is hereby made : COMPOUND WORDS, 
 Funk & Wagnalls Company's Standard Dictionary; 
 GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION, PLURALS, CAPITALIZA- 
 TION, Maxwell's Advanced Lessons in English Gram- 
 mar, Bain's Higher English Grammar, Century and 
 Standard Dictionaries, Correct English, and Raub's 
 Punctuation and Letter-Writing; SPELLING and SYL- 
 LABICATION, Webster's International Dictionary. The 
 lists of law terms and Latin phrases have been com- 
 piled chiefly from Bouvier's and Black's Law Diction- 
 aries; the chapter on Telegrams and Cablegrams from 
 pamphlets furnished by the Western Union and the 
 Commercial Cable Companies. 
 
 Special acknowledgment is due to the American 
 Book Company for permission to use the matter 
 based on Wilson's Treatise on Punctuation, Copyright 
 1871, 1899, by John Wilson. 
 
 The information relating to Catholic Titles was 
 approved in manuscript by a prelate of the Catholic 
 Church ; credit is due to H. T. Loomis's book, Letter- 
 Writing, for the method of arrangement, and to H. E. 
 Gavit's The Etiquette of Correspondence for suggestions. 
 
 The model forms of letters represent the preference
 
 Preface v 
 
 of a majority of law firms and business houses. The 
 forms of the legal papers are those in popular use and 
 will give the student and novice a knowledge of what 
 will be required of him in a law office. With the 
 exception of names, these papers are almost exact 
 copies of documents that have been used in actual 
 lawsuits. 
 
 ELEANORA BANKS. 
 NEW YORK, 
 
 July i, 1912.
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 LETTER-WRITING ...... i 
 
 LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION . . .17 
 LETTERS OF RECOMMENDATION . . 18 
 MODEL FORMS FOR LETTERS ... 20 
 LETTERS TO WOMEN . . . .31 
 
 THINGS TO BE NOTICED ... 36 
 
 How TO MAKE SYMBOLS AND PUNCTUATION- 
 MARKS ...... 38 
 
 ENVELOPES, CARDS, ETC. 39 
 
 MANIFOLDING ..... 39 
 LETTER-PRESS COPYING , . .40 
 
 As TO THE SUBSTANCE OF LETTERS . 41 
 
 TIME-SAVING EXPEDIENTS .... 43 
 
 FLAGGING 44 
 
 RIDERS 44 
 
 FIGURES AND SIGNS . . . . 46 
 
 vii
 
 Vlll 
 
 Contents 
 
 PAGE 
 
 THE POSSESSIVE CASE 51 
 
 PLURALS ....... 54 
 
 PLURALS OF FOREIGN WORDS . . 56 
 PLURALS OF NAMES .... 58 
 
 TITLES, FORMS OF ADDRESS AND SALUTATION 59 
 COMPOUND WORDS . . . .68 
 
 CAPITALIZATION 75 
 
 PUNCTUATION 84 
 
 SYLLABICATION 112 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND CONTRACTIONS . .116 
 
 SPELLING . 127 
 
 POETRY 135 
 
 COURT DOCUMENTS 137 
 
 COURT TESTIMONY 162 
 
 OTHER LEGAL PAPERS 166 
 
 MODEL FORMS FOR LEGAL PAPERS AND WILLS 168 
 LAW PHRASES . . . . .186 
 LATIN WORDS AND PHRASES . . .192 
 
 THE CORRECT WORD 207 
 
 USELESS WORDS , 218
 
 Contents ix 
 
 PAGE 
 
 "INDEX EXPURGATORIUS " .... 220 
 
 TELEGRAMS 225 
 
 CABLEGRAMS ...... 230 
 
 GENERAL POSTAL INFORMATION . . . 234 
 
 PROOFREADING , 242
 
 A Manual of Reference 
 
 LETTER- WRITING 
 
 The important parts of a letter are : 
 
 1 . The HEADING (the name, place, date, business 
 
 or profession) . 
 
 2. The INTRODUCTION (comprising the Address 
 
 and the Salutation). 
 
 3. The BODY (the statements made or informa- 
 
 tion given by the writer to the 
 person addressed) . 
 
 4. The CONCLUSION (comprising the Compli- 
 
 mentary Close and the 
 Signature). 
 
 5. The SUPERSCRIPTION (direction on the en- 
 
 velope). 
 
 THE HEADING. 
 
 The HEADING of business letters contains the name, 
 address and business of the writer, and the date. 
 
 Generally, engraved or printed letter-heads are 
 used, giving all of the Heading except the date. 
 
 When it is necessary to write the Heading, the 
 following is a proper form :
 
 2 Letter-Writing 
 
 New York Hotel, 
 
 Broadway and Forty- fourth Street, 
 New York, Sept. 17, 1911. 
 
 The name and address part of the Heading may be 
 placed in the left-hand corner of the page, or in the 
 center, but in either case the date should be put at 
 the right. 
 
 R. E. Lee Young, 
 145 Lawrence Street, 
 Boston, Mass. 
 
 August 16, 1910. 
 
 T. C. Cowell & Son, 
 
 Drugs, Chemicals, Paints, Oils, 
 
 133 Duane Street, 
 
 New York, August 17, 1910. 
 
 Where the Heading is long, make it compact by 
 single spacing. 
 
 Text-books on letter-writing almost without ex- 
 ception declare the rule that the second line of the 
 Heading should begin about an inch to the right of 
 the first line, and the third about an inch to the right 
 of the second line, in the following form: 
 
 Franklin College, 
 
 New Ycrk City, 
 
 Jan. 6, 1910. 
 
 But this form has no advantage, either in appearance 
 or in convenience, over the other forms given; in 
 fact, it is less artistic. A good form is to center the 
 first line, if short, upon the second line :
 
 THe Heading 3 
 
 Franklin College, 
 New York City, Jan. 27, 1910. 
 
 Do not begin the date line to the left of the middle 
 of the page. 
 
 The house number and the street, or the room num- 
 ber and the building, form a single item and should 
 not be separated by a comma: 24 Broad Street, 
 New York. 16 Masonic Temple, Chicago, 111. 
 
 The address of the writer is sometimes placed at 
 the close of the letter, immediately under the signa- 
 ture, but that is not the best form. 
 
 Do not crowd the Heading close to the top of the 
 page. Leave a margin of at least an inch. 
 
 The date line should end half or three-quarters of 
 an inch from the edge of the paper on the right. 
 
 It is not necessary to write the ordinal endings d, 
 rd, ndj st, or th, after the day of the month in the date. 
 Figures alone are sufficient. 
 
 When the forms ist, 2d, I5th, etc., are used, no 
 period should be placed after them, as they are not 
 abbreviations. 
 
 It is permissible in some cases, but not desirable, 
 to use figures to indicate the month; as, 9/22, 1907 ; or, 
 9/22/07, for September 22, 1907. The best way is to 
 write the name of the month and thus save the reader 
 the effort of determining what the ninth month is. 
 
 In social notes or letters of a friendly nature, the 
 date may be placed at the end, at the left margin, on 
 the next line below that on which the signature is 
 written. 
 
 THE INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The INTRODUCTION consists of the ADDRESS and 
 the SALUTATION, or greeting.
 
 4 Letter-Writing 
 
 The ADDRESS contains the name, the title and the 
 place of business or residence of the person to whom 
 the letter is written. In a business letter none of 
 these items should be omitted. 
 
 If the place be a city of considerable size, the house 
 number and the street should be given. 
 
 Place a comma after each line of the Address, 
 except the last, where a period is necessary. If the 
 name ends with "Co." or "Esq." or any other 
 abbreviation, the comma follows the period. 
 
 In business correspondence the name and address 
 are usually written at the beginning of the letter. In 
 a social letter they may be placed at the end, below 
 the signature, at the left margin. 
 
 Commence the name at the left margin, indent 
 first line of address five spaces, second line ten spaces, 
 and place Salutation at left margin and begin first 
 paragraph ten spaces from margin. 
 
 If the name and address occupy more than three 
 lines, the lines may be single-spaced. 
 
 When the Address is short, it may be put in two 
 lines, full space between, indenting second line five 
 to eight spaces. 
 
 Messrs. Baldwin & Greene, 
 
 124 Broadway, New York City, 
 
 is a neater form than 
 
 Messrs. Baldwin & Greene, 
 124 Broadway, 
 
 New York City.
 
 THe Body 5 
 
 The following is neat, compact, and in popular 
 use: 
 
 Correct English Publishing Company, 
 Chicago, 111. 
 
 When a letter requires the special attention of a 
 particular member of the firm, or a department 
 manager, one of the following forms may be used: 
 
 Messrs. Smith & Kramer, 
 
 Denver, Colo. 
 Mr. James Field, Manager, 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Messrs. Smith & Kramer, 
 
 Denver, Colo. 
 Gentlemen: (Attention of Mr. Field.) 
 
 THE BODY. 
 
 The BODY of the letter contains what is communi- 
 cated from the writer to the person addressed. It 
 begins on the next line below the Introduction, in- 
 dented five or ten spaces from the margin, according 
 to the judgment of the operator or the custom of 
 the office. 
 
 All other paragraphs should begin at the same point 
 as the initial paragraph. 
 
 A short letter is arranged by artistic operators in 
 short lines with wide margins. 
 
 Learn to estimate just how many lines of type-
 
 6 Letter-Writing 
 
 writing a page of notes will make, so that the page 
 can be artistically arranged. 
 
 The SUBJECT of the letter may be written across 
 the page, either before or after the Introduction; 
 preferably before, where there is but one Subject, 
 as this method does not separate the Introduction 
 from the Body of the letter. (See Model i.) 
 
 When there is more than one Subject, a side-head or 
 a center-head should introduce each. (See Model 2.) 
 
 In some cases the Subject is written in the body of 
 the letter, in capitals or underscored. (See Model 6.) 
 
 Double-space all letters unless instructed to single- 
 space them, but single-space the last two or three 
 lines to avoid carrying over a single line or two 
 lines to another page. 
 
 In a single-spaced letter, double-space on each 
 side of the Salutation and between paragraphs. 
 
 The second and succeeding pages of the letter 
 should be written upon blank sheets. 
 
 The name or initials of the person addressed should 
 be written near the left margin at the top of the 
 second and following pages, together with the number 
 of the page. 
 
 When the date is required to be given on each 
 sheet, put it after the name or initials at the left 
 and place the page number in the upper right-hand 
 corner. 
 
 It is a good practice to number pages at the top, 
 as this will not interfere with the placing of additional 
 matter at the bottom should it be found desirable. 
 
 Place the initials of the person who dictates the 
 letter, when this is required, at the end of the letter, 
 at the left. (See Model 2.) 
 
 Place initials of stenographer, when required, after
 
 The Body 7 
 
 those of the dictator in the same line at the left, and 
 the time of dictation, if required, may follow on the 
 same line. (See Model I.) 
 
 Letters on half-sheets should not extend over to 
 a second page. Better use a larger sheet. 
 
 Do not begin a paragraph at the bottom of the 
 page unless there is room for at least three lines. 
 
 Do not carry over a few words, or a single line, to 
 a new page. Carry over at least three lines besides 
 the Complimentary Close, or else single-space the 
 last few lines at the bottom of the preceding page in 
 order to complete the letter on that page. 
 
 When there is a list of items or an enumeration of 
 particulars in the body of a letter, indent and tabu- 
 late. (See Models 4 and 5.) 
 
 When a telegram or other matter is to be quoted 
 in a letter, it is made prominent by indenting at both 
 right and left margins and setting it in single space. 
 If the quoted matter consists of more than one para- 
 graph, place quotation marks at the beginning of 
 each paragraph and at the end of the last one. (See 
 Model 6.) 
 
 The affixes th, st, rd, nd are not necessary, and are 
 seldom used, in dates in the Heading, but are some- 
 times required in the Body of the letter, and especially 
 when the word "instant," "ultimo," or "proximo" 
 follows a date. No period should be placed after 
 such terminations, as they are not abbreviations. 
 As, "Replying to your favor of the i6th inst." 
 
 Instant (abbreviated inst.}, frequently used in 
 letters, means present, current, and refers to the 
 present month. 
 
 Ultimo (ult.) means last, and refers to the month 
 last past.
 
 8 Letter- Writing 
 
 Proximo (prox.} means coming, and refers to the 
 month next, to come. 
 
 The closing sentence, such as "Awaiting your 
 reply," or "Hoping to hear from you immediately," 
 usually begins a paragraph. After such expressions 
 a comma, not a period, is required, for the reason that 
 the sense is not complete without the Complimentary 
 Close and the signature. 
 
 A Postscript should begin at the paragraph point, 
 at least three double spaces below the Complimentary 
 Close, introduced by the initials "P. S." followed by 
 a dash and the matter of the postscript on the same 
 line. Only the initials of the writer are signed to 
 the postscript, and it should not be followed by any 
 form of Complimentary Close. (See Model 3.) 
 
 Any enclosures should be indicated at the end of 
 the letter, at the left margin. (See Model I.) 
 
 Enclosures should be folded neatly and placed in- 
 side of the letter-sheet and, if there are many, should 
 be attached to the sheet by a small pin or metal clip. 
 It is supposed that a check has the best effect upon 
 its recipient when pinned across the top of the letter- 
 head in such a position as to catch his eye immediately 
 upon opening the letter. 
 
 When the letter is finished, ready for signature, 
 slip the flap of the envelope over it and fasten with 
 a clip. 
 
 The abbreviations permissible in a letter are few: 
 The month in the date-line, the State in the address; 
 the words "street" and "avenue" in the address 
 (though some business houses object to this); the 
 name of a State in the body of the letter when pre- 
 ceded by the name of a town never when used alone ; 
 inst., ult., and prox.; No. for "number" when pre-
 
 THe Conclusion 9 
 
 ceding figures;/, o. b. and like commercial terms; a 
 title preceding a name, as Hon., Rev., Prof. 
 
 THE CONCLUSION. 
 
 The CONCLUSION consists of the Complimentary 
 Close and the Signature. 
 
 The Complimentary Close is the expression of 
 respect or regard which properly terminates a letter. 
 
 The style of the Complimentary Close varies ac- 
 cording to the relations of the writer and the person 
 addressed, and should correspond in character to 
 the Salutation. Business letters require an expres- 
 sion of respect only. If the Salutation be "Dear Mr. 
 Blank," or "My dear James," the appropriate 
 closing is "Yours very truly," or "Sincerely yours," 
 or some similar term, but not "Yours respectfully." 
 
 Begin the Complimentary Close in the middle of 
 the line regardless of the position of the closing words 
 of the letter. 
 
 The following are approved forms of the Compli- 
 mentary Close for business letters: 
 
 Yours truly, Respectfully yours, 
 
 Truly yours, Yours respectfully, 
 
 Yours very truly, Faithfully yours, 
 
 Very truly yours, Sincerely yours, 
 
 Very respectfully yours, Cordially yours. 
 
 "Very truly yours" and "Yours very truly" are 
 equally correct. 
 
 "Cordially yours" is used when the writer desires 
 to express a more kindly interest than strictly business 
 relations call for. 
 
 "Sincerely yours" is reserved for letters of friend- 
 ship and is rarely used in business letters.
 
 10 Letter-Writing 
 
 "Fraternally yours" is confined to letters between 
 insurance companies and fraternal orders and their 
 members and between the members themselves. 
 
 The expression "Your obedient servant" is no 
 longer used in business letters. It is still adhered to 
 in military circles and is appropriate in addressing a 
 superior. 
 
 "Respectfully yours" is proper in letters from the 
 young to the aged, from an inferior to a superior, or 
 from a stranger to a person of note or prominence. 
 
 A petition to a legislative body, such as a Board of 
 Aldermen, may begin with "Gentlemen," or "Sirs," 
 and close with "Respectfully submitted," or "All of 
 which is respectfully submitted. " 
 
 Do not omit the word "yours" in the Closing of a 
 business letter. "Very truly," or "Very sincerely," 
 without the word "yours" added is not considered 
 good form. 
 
 Never close a letter with merely "Yours," or 
 "Yours, etc." This is considered an indication of 
 disrespect, or, at least, of careless regard. 
 
 Capitalize only the first word, or the first word of 
 each line, of the Complimentary Close. No other 
 word, except a proper name or a title, should begin 
 with a capital. Thus: "Yours very truly," not 
 "Yours Very Truly." 
 
 "Assuring you, my dear Colonel, of my 
 sincere regard, I am, 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 James Jones." 
 
 "Your affectionate son, 
 
 Charles. "
 
 The Signature II 
 
 A title, such as Captain, Colonel, General, used in 
 the Salutation or Complimentary Close should not 
 be abbreviated. 
 
 The Complimentary Close may be omitted from a 
 letter of recommendation beginning "To Whom It 
 May Concern. " 
 
 If no Salutation be used, the Complimentary Close 
 should be omitted. 
 
 The word "remain" in the Complimentary Close 
 implies previous correspondence. The first letter 
 should close with "I am," if such a term be used at 
 all. 
 
 SIGNATURE. 
 
 The SIGNATURE is the name, often accompanied 
 by an official title, of the person who writes the letter. 
 It should be placed at the right-hand side, at the 
 bottom of the letter, following the Complimentary 
 Close. 
 
 The Signature commonly begins about the middle of 
 the Complimentary Close, the latter beginning at 
 the middle of the scale. 
 
 When made on the typewriter, the Signature should 
 be all capitals. 
 
 When the Signature is to be written in with pen, 
 leave at least two double spaces between the Compli- 
 mentary Close and the title of the person who signs 
 the letter, printing in the title. 
 
 Lines for Signatures are not usually placed upon 
 letters. 
 
 Where signature lines are required, as on legal 
 documents, leave three single spaces between them. 
 
 By and Per in the Signature should begin with a 
 capital letter.
 
 12 Letter- Writing 
 
 When the title following the Signature is a long 
 one, place it so the Signature will fall in the center 
 of the title, thus: 
 
 GEORGE HILL 
 Manager Edison Electric Works. 
 
 If the title be short, it may follow the name: 
 
 GEORGE HILL, Administrator. 
 Styles of Signatures: 
 
 EDISON ELECTRIC WORKS, 
 
 By 
 
 Manager. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA BOND & MORTGAGE CO. 
 Per S. M. 
 
 A woman, writing to a stranger, should prefix to 
 her Signature her title, "Mrs." or "Miss," in marks 
 of parenthesis. A married woman may use her 
 husband's name or her own Christian name, in the 
 latter case, if necessary for exact identification, plac- 
 ing her husband's name in parenthesis below it, or at 
 the left-hand margin without the parenthesis. 
 
 Mary Blank 
 (Mrs. J. W. Blank.) 
 Or thus: 
 
 Mary Blank 
 Mrs. J. W. Blank. 
 
 On legal documents a married woman always signs 
 her Christian name "Mary Blank." 
 
 A widow should sign, in all cases, her own Christian 
 name "Mrs. Mary Blank" or "Mary Blank."
 
 THe Superscription 13 
 
 THE SUPERSCRIPTION. 
 
 The SUPERSCRIPTION is the direction placed upon 
 the envelope. It consists of the name, title, and 
 residence or post-office address. 
 
 The name should be placed about the middle of the 
 envelope, leaving equal spaces at right and left, top 
 and bottom. Each of the succeeding lines should 
 begin a little farther to the right than the preceding 
 line, the State occupying the lower right-hand corner. 
 The following model is furnished by the Post-Office 
 Department as the correct form of address, stamping 
 and return- card. 
 
 AFTER . . . DAYS KETURN T 
 
 JOHN C. SMITH 
 
 146 STATE ST. 
 WILKESVILLE, N. Y. 
 
 Mr. Prank B. Jones, 
 
 2416 Front Street, 
 
 Oswego, 
 Ohio. 
 
 If the post-office is a large city, the county may be 
 omitted, but if the post-office is a small town it is 
 safer to give the county. 
 
 The State should always be given, even in the case 
 of very large cities. There are several New Yorks, 
 Bostons, and Philadelphias in the United States.
 
 14 Letter-Writing 
 
 If the person addressed have no official or profes- 
 sional title, the common title "Mr." or "Esq.," 
 "Mrs. " or "Miss" should be given. Even business 
 haste does not excuse its omission. 
 
 Prefix the abbreviation " Messrs. " (never " Mess. ") 
 to firm names, but not to corporation names. Firm 
 names may be distinguished from corporation names 
 by the fact that in the former the words " & Company " 
 usually follow the names of the individuals; as, 
 "Smith, Jones & Co." In corporation names the 
 word "and" is omitted, and often the name begins 
 with "The"; as, "The Newark Construction Com- 
 pany." Such names as the latter should never have 
 the word "Messrs." prefixed. 
 
 A letter to a person acting in an official capacity 
 should bear his official title on the envelope; as, 
 
 Mr. James Kenney, 
 
 Vice-President C.B. & Q,. R.R. Co., 
 Chicago , 
 
 Illinois. 
 
 The first word of each line of the address, every 
 other important word and all the abbreviations should 
 begin with a capital letter. The symbol % (care 
 of) is properly written with a small c. 
 
 Do not write " To " before the name on the envel- 
 ope, except before a title beginning with " The " or 
 "His," as in the following: 
 
 To His Excellency, 
 
 The President of the United States. 
 
 Do not write "No." before the street number, nor 
 "P. O. " before the number of the post-office box. 
 "20 Main Street" and "Box 14" is sufficient.
 
 THe Superscription 15 
 
 Where the address is long, requiring several lines, 
 the County may be placed in the lower left-hand 
 corner, on a line with the State. 
 
 Adrian Vanneman, Jr., Esq., 
 Box 176, 
 
 Bloomington, 
 Custer County, Tennessee. 
 
 When a title follows a name, put a comma between. 
 Put a comma after each line of the address except the 
 last. The comma is not required between the house 
 number and the name of the street, nor between the 
 number of a room and the name of the building, 
 unless the word "Room" is used also. The following 
 are correct forms: 
 
 26 Amsterdam Avenue; 37 World Building; Room 
 37, World Building. 
 
 Put a period after every abbreviation and at the 
 end of the complete address. 
 
 The words "General Delivery" or "Transient," 
 when necessary, may be put in the lower left-hand 
 corner. 
 
 Spell the avenues and streets designated by num-
 
 16 Letter-Writing 
 
 bers, in order to avoid placing two numbers in juxta- 
 position. Thus: 514 Fifth Avenue, not 514 5th 
 Avenue. 
 
 But where such a word as "North" or "East" 
 intervenes between the house number and the num- 
 ber indicating the street, the street name may be 
 written in figures. Thus: 514 North i64th Street. 
 
 When an official designation accompanies the name, 
 it may, if short, follow the name on the same line; as, 
 
 Mr. James Blank, Cashier, 
 
 76 Seventh Avenue. 
 
 On a square envelope the address sometimes is 
 placed, with good effect, in the form of an inverted 
 pyramid: 
 
 Rev. T. H. Houghton, 
 
 25 State Street, 
 
 Cleveland, 
 
 Ohio. 
 Do not address an envelope simply, 
 
 John Blank, 
 City. 
 
 The postal officials and clerks prefer the name in 
 full. 
 
 Avoid abbreviations as far as possible, except of ti- 
 tles, and especially, do not abbreviate names of cities. 
 
 Letters delivered by a friend or acquaintance should 
 bear upon the envelope some such phrase as "Cour- 
 tesy of Mr. Blank." 
 
 It is no longer customary to put "Present," or 
 "Addressed" on the envelope in lieu of the address, 
 when a letter is delivered by messenger.
 
 Letters of Introduction 17 
 
 LETTERS OF INTRODUCTION. 
 
 A Letter of Introduction is one introducing a friend 
 or acquaintance to an acquaintance who is absent. 
 
 Such letters are usually delivered in person. In 
 this case the envelope is left unsealed, and the name 
 of the person introduced should be written on the 
 lower left-hand corner. 
 
 New York, Dec. 18, 1907. 
 My dear Doctor: 
 
 I take pleasure in introducing to you 
 my esteemed friend, Dr. Thomas Brooks, 
 of Portland, Oregon. Any attention you 
 may show him will "be gratefully appre- 
 ciated by 
 
 Your friend, 
 
 John M. Elliott. 
 Dr. Andrew H. Sherman, 
 176 Fourth Avenue, 
 Augusta, Maine. 
 
 Dr. Andrew H. Sherman, 
 
 176 Fourth Avenue, 
 Augusta, 
 Maine 
 
 Introducing Dr. Thomas Brooks.
 
 18 Letter- Writing 
 
 LETTERS OF RECOMMENDATION. 
 
 Letters of Recommendation are of two kinds: 
 those addressed to an individual or a firm, known as 
 special, and those addressed "To Whom It May Con- 
 cern," known as general. The latter often begins 
 with "This is to certify," and may close with the 
 expression "Very respectfully, " or the complimentary 
 close may be omitted. 
 
 (Special Letter of Recommendation.) 
 
 New York, Aug. 27, 1911. 
 Hon. Charles M. Davis, 
 
 150 Fifth Avenue, 
 
 New York City. 
 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 It gives me pleasure to recommend to 
 you Mr. M. T. Platt, the bearer of this, 
 as a young man of great personal worth. 
 
 He is a graduate of Harvard Law 
 School and is seeking employment in a 
 law office. He is a man of fine family, 
 high moral character and attractive 
 social qualities. I trust you will be 
 able to find a place for him in your 
 office. I am sure you will find him 
 worthy of your confidence. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 B. J. Smith.
 
 Letters of Recommendation 19 
 
 (General Letter of Recommendation.") 
 
 New York, May 26, 1911. 
 
 TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: 
 
 THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the "bearer, 
 Mr. Charles Atwood, has "been in the em- 
 ployment of this Company as Department 
 Manager for four years. His services 
 were very satisfactory. Mr. Atwood is a 
 man of strict integrity and great devo- 
 tion to duty. Because of his son's 
 illness he is obliged to remove to a 
 higher altitude. Any one desiring a man 
 of superior managerial ability will not 
 be disappointed in him. 
 
 SANDERS, GREENE & COMPANY.
 
 MODEL FORMS. 
 (Model i) 
 
 New York, May 18, 1909. 
 Plena v. Sanchez. 
 
 Jonas Wilson, Esq., 
 
 35 Nassau Street, New York. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 We are enclosing proof of service of 
 the demand in the Olena case. If you 
 will procure your order to show cause 
 to punish for contempt of court and send 
 it to us we will see that it also is 
 served. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 WILLIAMS & WALKER. 
 Die. THW/FM/2 PM 
 2 enclosures. 
 
 (Model 2) 
 
 New York, Nov. 6, 1909. 
 Mr. Warren Johnson, 
 
 Manager Dept. Maintenance and Constr. 
 International Paper Company, 
 30 Broad Street, New York. 
 
 Dear Sir: The indications are that the 
 
 20
 
 Model Forms 21 
 
 structural shops and mills will "be con- 
 gested during the year 1910 and, desir- 
 ing to give our customers the "benefit of 
 our experience, we wish to submit to you 
 the following 
 
 PROPOSAL OH STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK. 
 
 We will furnish the structural steel 
 and iron work which you may require 
 during the year 1910, consisting of 
 columns, beams, trusses, struts and pur- 
 lins, rafters and other material of this 
 character, together with their immediate 
 fittings, at the average price of THREE 
 AND 25/100 CTS. per pound ($.0325) 
 
 (2nd page) 
 W J - 2 
 
 DELIVERY AND PAYMENT. 
 
 We will deliver f.o.b. cars or 
 lighter our Works, Staten Island, and 
 give you sixty days. 
 
 We greatly appreciate your busi- 
 ness and hope for its continuance on 
 the above basis. 
 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 KLEIN BROTHERS & COMPANY, 
 
 By 
 
 Contracting Manager. 
 Die. WEB
 
 22 Letter- Writing 
 
 (Model j) 
 Chicago, 111., May 14, 1909." 
 
 Messrs. Phillips & Hoyt, 
 St. Louis, Mo. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 We acknowledge receipt of your let- 
 ter of May 12, enclosing copy of Judge 
 Graham's order for the appointment of 
 a guardian ad litem. Thank you very 
 much for your prompt attention to this 
 matter. 
 
 We shall now go ahead and prepare 
 the necessary papers for our action and 
 will send you copies as soon as pre- 
 pared. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 JAMES & HILL. 
 
 P. S. Can you not get another copy 
 of the order that we may hand to Mr. 
 Wilson, attorney for the other infant 
 defendant? 
 
 J. & H. 
 
 (Model 4) 
 
 New York, October 7, 1906. 
 Mr. -D. P. Stone, Architect, 
 76 Broad Street, 
 
 Elizabeth, N. J. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 Referring to 
 CONTRACT 1798, NATIONAL POWER HOUSE: 
 
 We acknowledge receipt of your 
 esteemed favor of the 6th inst., re-
 
 Model Forms 23 
 
 questing a more detailed statement of 
 our account, and hand you the same 
 herewith: 
 
 Brick $8150.00 
 
 Broken Stone 5267.75 
 
 Sand 217.77 
 
 Cement 499 . 50 
 
 Wages, including handling of 
 material, superintendence, 
 watchmen, etc 3739.95 
 
 Miscellaneous, including 
 telephone, car-fares, ex- 
 pressage, freight, special 
 tools, drafting, transport- 
 ing equipment, repairs, 
 etc 969.09 
 
 Hauling, Newark Bay Short 
 
 Line. 175.50 
 
 19,019.56 
 Plus lOg 901.96 
 
 19,921.52 
 Less lOg reservation 992.15 
 
 Due $18,929.37 
 
 for which we respectfully make applica- 
 tion for payment. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 ATLANTIC CONSTRUCTION CO. 
 
 By 
 
 Manager. 
 Diet. F. Dick, 
 CMJ: 2:30 P.M.
 
 24 Letter- Writing 
 
 (Model 5) 
 New York, December 29, 1907. 
 
 CONTRACT No. 1800-LAMBS 1 CLUB. 
 
 PROPOSAL FOR EXTRA WORK. 
 
 Messrs. A. R. Whitsett & Co., 
 
 127 Broadway, New York City. 
 
 Dear Sirs: 
 
 This estimate is for the increase in 
 weight of Lintels as called for by the 
 Architect in his recent instructions 
 over the Lintels called for in the con- 
 tract structural plans. 
 
 Detail weight, exclusive of 
 fourth story Lintels, as 
 per Specifications 1984 Ibs. 
 
 Weight as per original steel 
 plans , including fourth 
 story 1000 " 
 
 Making an increase in weight 
 
 of 984 " 
 
 Please note that these figures do 
 not include the fourth story Lintels, 
 which have not "been determined on up to 
 date. Therefore, the fourth story Lin- 
 tels will "be an extra for the full 
 amount, and this estimate will be sent 
 to you when we" get the information. 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 BENISON BROTHERS & CO. 
 
 By 
 
 Secretary.
 
 Model Forms 25 
 
 (Model 6) 
 
 MEYERS & JOHNSON 
 Contractors and Builders, 
 317 Pine Street 
 
 St. Louis, May 9, 1911. 
 No. 6867. 
 
 The Bell Construction Company, 
 
 24 Broadway, New York City. 
 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 Referring to our letter of the 6th 
 concerning CONTRACT 1763, CAR PLANT, ST. 
 LOUIS, we have to-day wired you as 
 follows : 
 
 "Contract 1763, Car Plant, St. Louis. 
 Stop work on shutters. Some sizes 
 increased. There will be no loss to 
 us." 
 
 We enclose herewith a copy of a 
 letter dated March 1st from The F. T. 
 Merrill Construction Company, and carbon 
 copy of our reply of even date. 
 
 You can proceed with the work of 
 getting out the four new shutters and of 
 changing the four shutters R.S.2 to 
 four shutters R.S.I with steel frames 
 for the wood-working shop unless you 
 hear from us to the contrary "by wire. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 MEYERS & JOHNSON, 
 By 
 
 Manager.
 
 26 Letter-Writing 
 
 (Model 7) 
 
 ARNOLD BROTHERS & COMPANY 
 
 Buil'ders. 
 19 Broadway 
 
 New York, April 30, 1910, 
 
 The Driscoll Wrought Iron Company, 
 50 Duane Street, New York. 
 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 Please furnish for account of this 
 Company the following items: 
 
 Item 
 
 No. 1. 20 galvanized iron floor 
 
 flanges screwed for 1^" W. 
 
 I. pipe having 2 holes in a 
 
 line for f" "bolts. 
 
 2. 20 galvanized iron 90 ' floor 
 
 flanges screwed for 1^" W.L. 
 pipe and having 2 holes for f" 
 "bolts within the 90. 
 
 3. 20 galvanized iron floor 
 
 flanges screwed for 1^" W.L. 
 
 pipe and having 3 holes for " 
 
 "bolts. 
 
 All the above are to replace those 
 broken in transit. The above-described 
 floor flanges were found most brittle. 
 You will understand from the description 
 what is required and pitch of bolt- 
 holes . 
 
 PACKING. To be well packed for export.
 
 Model Forms 27 
 
 PACK. L. To "be sent in triplicate at 
 date of shipment bearing 
 gross weights and dimensions 
 of each package. 
 
 INVOICE. To "be sent in duplicate at 
 date of shipment, bearing 
 our order number and marks 
 for shipment. 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 ARNOLD BROTHERS & COMPANY 
 
 By 
 
 Manager. 
 
 (Model 8} 
 
 New York, August 10, 1911. 
 Messrs. Manning, Maxwell & Moore, 
 
 45 State Street, Chicago. 
 Gentlemen: 
 
 We have a letter from your company 
 signed by Mr. Jose de Mere, in relation 
 to the Crane billed on July 3rd, but up 
 to this writing we have not received the 
 O.K. 'd bill. 
 
 Our Superintendent, Mr. Max von 
 Arnim, will be in your city on Monday 
 next and will call at your office. We 
 suggest that your Mr. De Mere confer 
 with Mr. Von Arnim with the view of 
 straightening out this matter. 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 NARLOR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 
 
 By . 
 
 Secretary. 
 Diet. F. Greer, 
 2:35 - J.
 
 28 Letter-Writing 
 
 FORMS SHOWING ARRANGEMENT OF 
 SUBJECTS AND ITEMS 
 
 MERRIWETHER BRIDGE COMPANY 
 
 21 Broadway, 
 
 New York. 
 
 May 26, 1912. 
 Mr. J. B. Knight, 
 
 Bridge Engineer L. I. R.R. Co. 
 
 Jamaica, N. Y. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 CONTRACT 1764: PARK RIDGE IMPROVEMENT: 
 
 We acknowledge receipt of your favor of May 24th 
 in relation to our bills for bridges at West Third 
 Street and Gravesend Avenue and our application 
 for payment dated January 3ist last. 
 
 GRAVESEND AVENUE: 
 
 We regret there should have been an error in weight 
 in our bill for material under Class I. 
 
 We therefore enclose corrected bill showing weight 
 of material under Class I as 26,298 Ibs. We give 
 you the details of same as follows: 
 
 4 Web Plates 22" x &* x 32' 8f" 4387 
 
 16 " Angles 6x 6 x 5 x 32 8f 10521 
 
 8 Cover Plates 14" x &* x 21' o* 4608 
 
 32 Stiff Angles 4" x 3^" x f* 528 
 
 32 Fillers 3^" x \ x o' 10* 164 
 
 Rivet Heads 687 
 
 20895 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 MERRIWETHER BRIDGE CO. 
 
 By
 
 Model Forms 29 
 
 MINTURN BROTHERS, INC., 
 
 II Broadway, 
 
 New York. 
 
 January 31, 1910. 
 
 Mr. Duncan Olcott, 
 
 Manager Keller Elevator Co., 
 
 Yonkers, N. Y. 
 Dear Sir: 
 
 CONTRACT 1778: FINISHING WORK KELLER MA- 
 CHINE SHOP: 
 
 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT: 
 
 We have performed work during the month of 
 January as follows : 
 
 Wages $7931 . 52 
 
 E. and L. M. Sanders, Bill of Jan. 2 '09 100. 10 
 
 Yonkers Warehouse Co. " Feb. 10 '09 162 . 06 
 
 Adams, Wilson & Co. " Feb. 1 1 '09 52 . 35 
 
 Lawrence Bros. " Feb. 14 '09 10.00 
 
 Twine & Beck, " May i '09 20.25 
 
 H. L. Shannon, " May 16 '09 15-15 
 
 Freight and cartage 2.35 
 
 $8293.78 
 
 for which we respectfully make application for 
 payment. 
 We shall greatly appreciate your prompt attention. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 MINTURN BROTHERS, INC. 
 
 By 
 
 Secretary. 
 
 Diet. F. Mark, 
 Mel: J:3P.M.
 
 3O Letter-Writing 
 
 BILLS. 
 
 Bills are generally made up :>n printed bill-heads 
 in a style similar to the following: 
 
 New York, August 1, 1911. 
 
 WILLIAM STEWART & CO. 
 
 to METROPOLITAN CONSTRUCTION CO. Dr. 
 
 To the following charges on account 
 of the Commercial Building, Wall 
 and New Streets: 
 1911 
 
 June 22, 45 Cement sacks des- 
 troyed, at 10^, $ 4.50 
 Cutting off angle in 
 Main Corridor, Ground 
 Floor, 14 hours 
 Ironworker at 56|^, 7.88 
 La~bor on iron work on 
 ceiling of Main Base- 
 ment Aug. 30 & 31, 
 32 hours at 56|/, 18.00 
 Work on angle irons in 
 Main Hall 'Elevator, 
 Sept. 2, 5, 6 & 7, 
 56 hours at 56^, 31.50 
 
 $63.68 
 Received payment
 
 Letters to Women 31 
 
 RECEIPT. 
 
 New York, May 23, 1911. 
 RECEIVED from George Moore Five hun- 
 dred and ten dollars ($510) in full of 
 account to date. 
 
 JOHNSON & MEYERS, 
 
 Per 
 
 Manager. 
 
 (Note that from, not of, is the proper word to 
 follow Received.) 
 
 LETTERS TO WOMEN. 
 
 How to address a firm composed of women; how 
 to address a young lady whether to call her "Dear 
 Madam" or "Dear Miss Blank," or to omit the salu- 
 tation altogether; whether to address a married lady 
 by her husband's title or to limit her to his bare initials 
 these are often puzzling questions; and, to make 
 the matter more complicated, authorities do not 
 wholly agree in their effort to settle it. 
 
 Century Dictionary says, "Madam is a conventional 
 term of address to women of any degree. " 
 
 Raub says that "Madam" is the proper form of 
 address in letters to married women and elderly un- 
 married women, and intimates that it may be applied 
 with propriety to young unmarried women. Some 
 authorities recommend the omission of the salutation 
 in a letter to a young unmarried woman who is a 
 stranger to the writer. Such omission, however,
 
 32 Letter- Writing 
 
 seems unnecessary, and certainly is not in accord 
 with modern business methods. 
 
 As we have no proper English plural for the word 
 " Madam" with which to address two or more women, 
 or a firm of women, we must borrow from the French 
 the plural "Mesdames." 
 
 Models for the Introduction in Letters to Married 
 Women. 
 
 (Model p.) 
 
 Mrs. John W. Smith, 
 
 New York, N. Y. 
 
 Dear Madam: (or, My dear Mrs. Smith:) 
 Your letter, etc. 
 
 (Model jo.) 
 
 Mrs. Mary S. Smith, 
 117 Broadway, 
 
 Hew York City. 
 My dear Madam: 
 
 (Model ii.) 
 (To a Firm) 
 
 Mesdames Smith & Jones, 
 117 Broadway, 
 
 New York City. 
 Ladies :
 
 Letters to Women 33 
 
 Models for the Introduction of Business Letters to 
 Unmarried Women. 
 
 (Model 12.) 
 
 Miss Mary Blank, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Dear Miss Blank: 
 
 (Model ij.) 
 
 Miss Mary Blank, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 My dear Miss Blank: 
 
 When one of the last two forms is used, it is well to 
 put the address at the close of the letter, commencing 
 it with the salutation, as follows: 
 
 My dear Miss Blank: 
 
 Your letter, etc. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 James K. Robinson. 
 Miss Mary Blank, 
 Chicago, 111. 
 
 (Model 14.) 
 
 Miss Mary Blank, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Dear Madam: 
 
 When it is not known whether the lady is married 
 or single, write: 
 
 (Model 75.) 
 
 Mary Blank, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Dear Madam:
 
 34 Letter- Writing 
 
 (Model 16.) 
 (To a Firm) 
 
 Misses Smith & Jones, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Ladies: 
 
 Note that " Dear Miss " is not good form and should 
 not be used without the surname. 
 
 The following are the appropriate salutations for 
 business letters to women: 
 
 Salutations for Married Women. 
 
 (Singular) (Plural) 
 
 Dear Madam (formal) \ 
 My dear Madam (more formal) > Ladies. 
 Madam (most formal) 
 
 Proper Forms of Salutation in Addressing Unmarried 
 Women. 
 
 (Singular) (Plural) 
 
 Dear Miss Blank: } (formal) 
 or 
 
 Dear Madam: 
 
 My dear Miss Blank: \ (more h Ladies: 
 or V formal) 
 
 My dear Madam: 
 
 Miss Mary Blank: (most formal) 
 
 In a letter to a man and a woman the salutation 
 is, 
 
 Dear Sir and Madam:
 
 Letters to Women 35 
 
 A woman who is a physician may be addressed: 
 
 Mary Blank, :.I.D. 
 
 or 
 Dr. Mary Blank: 
 
 One entitled to a scholastic degree: 
 Prof. Mary Blank 
 or 
 
 Prof. Mary Blank, A.M., Ph.D. 
 
 As to Affixing a Husband's Title to a Wife's Name. 
 
 Some authorities say that when a method of exact 
 identification is necessary it is correct to affix to a mar- 
 ried woman's name the honorary or professional title 
 of her husband, as Mrs. General Grant, Mrs. Dr. Smith. 
 Nevertheless, modern usage is opposed to this prac- 
 tice. The better form is to omit her husband's title 
 in addressing or referring to a married woman. 
 
 In writing to the head of a Catholic institution, 
 as, for example, the Sisters of Charity, the salutation 
 is (after giving the name in religion, if known), 
 "Reverend Mother. " 
 
 "Dear Sister" is the correct salutation in address- 
 ing a Sister of Charity, or a Sister of any similar 
 order. Thus: 
 
 Sister Angela, 
 
 Academy of the Sacred Heart, 
 
 Milwaukee, Wis. 
 Dear Sister: 
 
 The members of the order of the Ladies of the 
 Sacred Heart are addressed and spoken of as 
 "Madame."
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 THINGS TO BE NOTICED. 
 
 Letters and all typewritten matter should be free 
 from erasures, interlineations, alterations, or finger 
 marks. 
 
 When but one copy of a letter or other document is 
 to be made, insert a heavy sheet of paper between the 
 letter-head and the typewriter roller. This protects 
 the roller from indentation by the type and improves 
 the appearance of the writing in case the roller is old 
 or not smooth. 
 
 Leave a margin of at least an inch at the left and 
 three-quarters of an inch at the right of the page, 
 except on very narrow sheets. 
 
 Do not crowd the lines close to the top or bottom 
 of the sheet. Allow an inch and a half or more at 
 the top and at least an inch at the bottom. 
 
 Write on but one side of the paper. 
 
 Addresses that occupy only three lines may be 
 double or single spaced according to fancy. It is 
 neater to single-space addresses of more than three 
 lines. 
 
 Do not divide a syllable at the end of a line. 
 
 Paragraphs may be indented five, eight or ten 
 spaces. Usage varies in regard to this. Five spaces 
 where the paragraphs are many and the lines short. 
 
 36
 
 THings to be Noticed 37 
 
 Sentences closely related should not be put into 
 separate paragraphs unless it is desired to call particu- 
 lar attention to each point. This usage is general. 
 
 Except in reports, tabulations and like financial 
 documents, a sentence should not begin with figures. 
 For instance, write "One hundred men camped near 
 the river," not "100 men camped near the river." 
 
 Use figures for dates, sums of money, measurements, 
 in tabulated and statistical matter and wherever the 
 abbreviation "No." is used for "number." 
 
 Letters concerning one's own affairs, written to 
 strangers or mere acquaintances, and requiring an 
 answer, should have enclosed a stamp for return 
 postage; better still, a stamped envelope. 
 
 Postal cards do not require the salutation or com- 
 plimentary close. 
 
 Signature lines should not be placed on letters. 
 
 Signature lines should be placed on legal documents. 
 
 Signature lines should be made by the underscore- 
 mark. 
 
 When making signature lines or underlining words, 
 keep turning the ribbon. This ensures an even, 
 smooth line. Display words are sometimes under- 
 lined in red. This may be done with ink, red carbon, 
 or a red ribbon. 
 
 Where there are more signature lines than one, 
 leave three single spaces between them. 
 
 Never write "Gents." instead of "Gentlemen" 
 nor "Mess." for "Messrs." 
 
 Use the symbol & only in firm names and in tabu- 
 lations where space is limited, and combined with 
 the letter "c" for "and so forth." 
 
 Foreign names containing the syllables de, von, 
 etc., are written as follows: Max van der Pals, 
 
 428977
 
 38 Letter- Writing 
 
 Adam de la Halle, Henry von Arnim. But when the 
 family name directly follows Mr. the first syllable is 
 capitalized: Mr. Van der Pals, Mr. La Halle, Mr. 
 Von Arnim. (See Model 8.) 
 
 TO MAKE SYMBOLS AND PUNCTUATION MARKS. 
 
 By holding down the space bar, different charac- 
 ters may be made by striking one type over another. 
 
 To make the cent sign, hold down space bar, strike 
 small c and the oblique line over it, . 
 
 Exclamation point, hold down space bar and strike 
 the period and the apostrophe. 
 
 Sign of division, strike colon and hyphen. 
 
 Sign of pounds sterling, strike capital L and the 
 hyphen over it, . 
 
 Sign of equality, strike hyphen, depress shift 
 slightly and strike hyphen again immediately under 
 the first. 
 
 Apostrophe (') indicates minutes, feet. 
 
 Quotation-marks ("), seconds, inches, ditto. 
 
 Small o, slightly elevated (), degrees. 
 
 Two hyphens (--), a dash. 
 
 Small x, multiplication. 
 
 The oblique line (/) is combined in many ways: 
 2/6, 2 shillings, 6 pence; a/c, account; B/L, bill of 
 lading; c/o, care of; L/C, letter of credit. 
 
 SPACING AFTER PUNCTUATION. 
 
 After period, exclamation point, interrogation, that 
 is, between sentences, two spaces; three are permis- 
 sible. After a period following an abbreviation or 
 initial, one space. After a colon or semicolon, one
 
 Envelopes, Cards 39 
 
 space. After a comma, one space. No space be- 
 tween the dash and the word which precedes or the 
 one which follows it. 
 
 ENVELOPES, CARDS, ETC. 
 
 Press the envelope firmly to the cylinder by mov- 
 ing the envelope clamps toward the centre. If the 
 envelope is not held firmly the work will be blurred. 
 "Shadowgraphs" of rubber, with an opening large 
 enough for only one letter, can be obtained for use 
 in writing on envelopes and other uneven surfaces. 
 
 To bring the name in the center of the envelope, 
 insert until only the lower edge remains visible at the 
 back of the cylinder. 
 
 Insert envelopes, postal cards and narrow paper 
 on the right side of the machine and fix firmly to place 
 by the clamps. 
 
 Press to cylinder with thumb when spacing for line. 
 
 When the same matter is to be written upon a 
 number of cards, first write it upon paper to ascertain 
 the space it will fill. Place the card upon the sheet 
 of paper, mark around it with a pencil and write the 
 matter within the enclosed space. 
 
 FOLDING. 
 
 Fold the bottom of the sheet to within a quarter 
 of an inch of the top, then fold from right to left and 
 from left to right to fit the envelope. 
 
 MANIFOLDING. 
 
 By the use of carbon paper duplicate copies of the 
 same writing are made at the same time, the number of 
 copies depending upon the thickness of the paper used.
 
 40 Letter- Writing 
 
 Upon the sheet upon which the writing is to be 
 done lay a sheet of semi-carbon paper, the face or 
 carbonized surface downward. On this lay another 
 sheet of writing-paper and so on until the requisite 
 number are laid. Put the whole in the machine in 
 the usual way, even and straight, with the carbon 
 side facing from the operator and toward the cylinder. 
 Write in the ordinary way, tapping the keys with a 
 little more force than usual. If the carbon copies are 
 dim or blurred the cause is either worn carbons or 
 warped cylinder. 
 
 To make erasures on carbon work in the machine, 
 turn the paper forward or backward, separate the 
 sheets and place a stiff card or the tin shield furnished 
 for the purpose back of the first sheet, erase and 
 continue in the same way with the other sheets ; turn 
 the paper back to position and make the corrections. 
 
 After the sheets have been taken from the machine 
 corrections are best made on the carbon copies by 
 placing a piece of carbon paper on the ribbon before 
 writing in the corrections. This will make the cor- 
 rection less visible. 
 
 Carbons while in place in the machine should be 
 handled very little, as the sheets are likely to wrinkle 
 and mar the written page with lines and blurs. 
 
 LETTER-PRESS COPYING. 
 
 1. Have a number of cloths the size of the leaves 
 of the letter-book dampened uniformly. 
 
 2. Place a sheet of oiled pasteboard on the left 
 side of the open letter-book. Upon this oil sheet 
 place one of the damp cloths. 
 
 3. Place the tissue leaf of the letter-book over 
 the damp cloth.
 
 Substance of Letters 41 
 
 4. Lay the letter, face down, on the tissue leaf. 
 
 5. Lay another oil sheet on the back of the letter, 
 place a damp cloth on the oil sheet, put another tissue 
 leaf of the book over the damp cloth, then another 
 letter, face down, then another oil sheet, another damp 
 cloth, another leaf, another letter, and so on until all 
 the letters are in the book. 
 
 6. Place an oil board over the last damp cloth to 
 protect the rest of the book. 
 
 7. Close the book and place it under pressure. 
 Typewritten letters should be left under pressure 
 about two minutes. Pen-written letters copy in 
 less than half a minute. 
 
 On taking the letters out, place dry blotters between 
 the damp pages of the letter-book. 
 
 AS TO THE SUBSTANCE OF LETTERS. 
 
 "Good letter-writing is one of the mainsprings of 
 business." 
 
 Chesterfield said that a well-written letter has 
 opened the way to prosperity for many a one. It is 
 certain that well-written letters open the way to 
 prosperity for stenographers. 
 
 The following remarks are intended for those who are 
 entrusted with the writing and the revising of letters. 
 
 Never waste time in more compliments than are 
 demanded by the common courtesy due from one 
 man to another. 
 
 Never say anything that has nothing to do with 
 the subject.
 
 42 Letter- Writing 
 
 Always say all that the subject really requires and 
 say that clearly. 
 
 Commence with the most important subject of 
 your letter. 
 
 Do not close a letter to a stranger with "I remain, 
 Very truly yours, " but with " I am, Very truly yours, " 
 if such form of closing be deemed desirable. "I 
 remain" is correct only where there has been previous 
 correspondence. 
 
 A note in the third person should not have the 
 writer's name attached. 
 
 The reply to a note in the third person should also 
 be in the third person. 
 
 The reply to a letter or note written in the first 
 person should invariably be in the first person. 
 
 The answer to a joint note of invitation from a 
 husband and wife or from several members of a family 
 should contain an allusion to all. But the envelope 
 should be addressed to the senior only, or to the wife 
 alone, if in the name of a husband and wife.
 
 TIME-SAVING EXPEDIENTS. 
 
 " To save time is to lengthen life" 
 
 Many business houses allow the use of certain 
 well-tried and unmistakable time-saving expedients. 
 These special forms must be learned and used by the 
 stenographer in conformity with the custom of the 
 house. Innovations should be cautiously tested 
 before being generally used. 
 
 It should be borne in mind that these short forms 
 are not to be used in general correspondence nor in 
 legal or formal documents, but are adapted only to 
 papers passing between the various branches of one 
 business, the various departments of a railroad or 
 other corporation, and the like. 
 
 The following are brief forms in most general use: 
 
 Ordinal endings on dates are dropped. 
 
 No punctuation in addresses. 
 
 Addresses put in two lines unless very long. 
 S T Jameson Esq 
 Denver Colo 
 
 The period omitted after abbreviations and con- 
 tractions; as, "Your letter of 5th inst reed"; 5 bu 
 3 pks; 8 ft 7 in. Abbreviations in constant use 
 written without spacing or punctuation: AM, PM, 
 am, pm; COD, cod; fob (free on board); cif (cost, 
 insurance and freight); Icl (less than carload); 
 rpm (revolutions per minute); P/T (private terms); 
 B/L (bill of lading); S/S or SS (steamship; as, SS 
 
 43
 
 44 Time-Saving Expedients 
 
 SYRIA); B/P (blue-print); HP, hp (horse-power); 
 CP cp (candle-power); RR (railroad). So also the 
 initials of a railroad are written without punctuation : 
 as, N Y C & H R RR (New York Central & Hudson 
 River Railroad). 
 
 The quotation mark (") designates inches, the 
 apostrophe (') designates feet; thus, 6' 5". 
 
 Small slightly elevated designates degrees: 7. 
 
 FLAGGING. 
 
 It is sometimes necessary, in the course of dictation, 
 to turn back a few pages and insert a paragraph, or a 
 series of paragraphs, at a given point on a page of 
 notes. Where there is not room to write this addi- 
 tional matter on the margin of the page on which it 
 is to be inserted, some writers make a "flag" at the 
 point of insertion and place a figure upon it, thus: 
 
 P, then turn to a blank page and write the notes 
 to be inserted, making a similar flag, bearing 
 the same number, at the beginning of the inserted 
 paragraph and also at its close, or else indicating the 
 close in some other unmistakable manner. This 
 method is called "flagging." 
 
 Instead of the flag, it is easier to make the caret, 
 placing the figure above it, thus %, the same symbol 
 being placed at the beginning and the close of the 
 inserted matter. When more than one insertion is 
 made, each set of symbols must bear a different 
 number. 
 
 RIDERS 
 
 A Rider is a separate piece of writing or print added 
 to a manuscript, proof-sheet, or other document
 
 Riders 45 
 
 It is marked by an identifying letter or figure in the 
 upper left-hand corner, as "Rider I," or "Rider A, 
 page 5, " and is pasted or pinned to the page to which 
 it is an addition, on which page is also placed, at the 
 proper point, the same identifying mark.
 
 FIGURES AND SIGNS. 
 
 ARABIC AND ROMAN NUMERALS. 
 
 Arabic Roman Arabic Roman Arabic Roman 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 6 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 9 
 10 
 ii 
 
 Lower case / makes the Arabic figure one. Capi- 
 tal makes zero. Capital I makes Roman one. 
 
 Roman characters are used to indicate the chapter 
 in Scriptural references, Arabic numerals to indicate 
 the verse. Luke XII, 10-14. 
 
 Small letters may be used in the Roman notation. 
 Luke xii, 10, 14. 
 
 A period is usually placed after the Roman charac- 
 ters, though in the business world this custom is 
 falling into disuse. 
 
 Do not begin a sentence with figures or symbols. 
 , 46 
 
 XII 
 
 50 
 
 L 
 
 XIII 
 
 60 
 
 LX 
 
 XIV 
 
 70 
 
 LXX 
 
 XV 
 
 80 
 
 LXXX 
 
 XVI 
 
 90 
 
 XC 
 
 XVII 
 
 IOO 
 
 C 
 
 XVIII 
 
 200 
 
 cc 
 
 XIX 
 
 500 
 
 D 
 
 XX 
 
 600 
 
 DC 
 
 XXX 
 
 IOOO 
 
 M 
 
 XL 
 
 1500 
 
 MD
 
 Figures and Signs 47 
 
 Do not bring together two groups of figures; as, 
 "In 1900, 17,000 bales of cotton were shipped from 
 Atlanta." Change the construction to "Seventeen 
 thousand bales of cotton were shipped from Atlanta 
 in 1900"; or, "In 1900 there were shipped from At- 
 lanta 17,000 bales of cotton." 
 
 Write 660 Seventh Avenue, not 660 7th Avenue. 
 
 Use figures in statistical tables, measurements, 
 reports, etc. 
 
 "The house is 40 by 80 (or 40 x 80) ft.'* 
 " Three 2o-lb. beams." 
 
 When the contraction No. precedes it, a numeral 
 should always be expressed by figures; as, No. 29. 
 
 Never use figures in expressions like the following: 
 "More than a hundred men witnessed the race." 
 "He won by less than a thousand votes." 
 
 When round numbers are used and no comparison 
 is made between one sum and another, words are 
 generally used instead of figures. "The population 
 of the United States is said to be more than ninety 
 millions." 
 
 In all important documents, especially those of a 
 legal nature, sums of money and numbers should be 
 spelled, followed by figures in marks of parenthesis. 
 The word "dollars" should precede the parenthesis, 
 not follow it; as, "Five hundred dollars ($500) was 
 the price paid. " 
 
 In writing numbers and sums of money in legal or 
 commercial documents, capitalize the first word only ; 
 as, "The price paid was Seventeen thousand dollars 
 ($17,000)." The capital may properly be omitted. 
 
 When numbers are expressed in words, commas 
 need not separate the parts. "Four thousand eight 
 hundred fifty."
 
 48 Figures and Sigfns 
 
 The method of writing cents varies. The more 
 usual and popular form is the character or simply 
 c. Thus, 3f* or 30; 3^c. In this case use no decimal 
 point. Never write it $ .03 except in bills or 
 tabulations where the position renders the meaning 
 obvious. 
 
 A newspaper rule is, "Spell out numbers under 
 loo," but in typewriting the general custom is to 
 spell numbers under 10. 
 
 In a series of numbers under 10, use figures; as, 
 "We return you to-day samples Nos. 4, 6, 8 and 
 
 9-" 
 
 Ordinal numbers are spelled, except in dates. 
 "On the General's orders the fifteenth man was 
 accepted." "On June 23rd we shipped you 100 
 chairs. " 
 
 Ordinal numbers expressed by figures and letters 
 do not require a period except at the end of the sen- 
 tence; 2 ist, 1 2th, 3rd. 
 
 Double numbers up to 100, expressed in words, 
 require a hyphen; as, twenty-five; one hundred 
 sixty-five. 
 
 Fractions expressed in words require a hyphen: 
 one-half; four twenty-fifths. 
 
 Fractions standing alone are spelled out, except 
 in specifications, tabulations and the like. 
 
 1-ut a space or a hyphen between a whole number 
 and a fraction, unless the machine has the fractional 
 form: 4 %, 4-^. 
 
 A hyphen between numbers of pages or other ob- 
 jects means that all intervening numbers are included ; 
 pages 54-65 means all pages from 54 to 65 inclusive. 
 A comma between these numbers limits them to the 
 two pages mentioned. The phrase "pages 54, 65,"
 
 Figures and Signs 49 
 
 means that only the two pages specifically named are 
 to be considered. "Pages 54-65, 80, 90, 94-98" 
 includes both methods. 
 
 Ordinarily, numbers used as names of streets, 
 districts, wards, and the like, should be spelled. In 
 the Tenth Ward; Twenty-fourth Street; the Fourth 
 of July; eleven o'clock. 
 
 In such expressions as 9:30 A.M., figures are used. 
 
 Separate hours from minutes by a colon. 
 
 In giving dimensions, x .may be used instead of the 
 word by; as, "The lot is 125 x 90 ft." 
 
 In statistical tables, measurements, etc., signs 
 for feet and inches may be used. "The house is 
 40' 6" x 30' 6"." 
 
 The signs %, #, $, @ jf; and abbreviations like 
 ft., No., in., should not be used without figures; 
 thus, 10%, not ten %; No. 12, not No. twelve; several 
 pounds of iron, not several Ibs. of iron. 
 
 There should be no space between the signs $, #, 
 %, i and the figure. 
 
 Space between @ and the figures between which it 
 stands. 
 
 Ai, used as an adjective, has no space between 
 letter and figure, and no period after. 
 
 When the whole number is spelled, the fraction 
 accompanying should be spelled. 
 
 In tabulations, bills, accounts, statements, etc., 
 the signs for dollars, number, at, etc., should not be 
 repeated. The appearance of the sign at the head of 
 the column is sufficient. The dollar sign is repeated 
 in the total. 
 
 Where there are many figures in a column the 
 omission of the comma and the decimal point improves 
 the appearance of the page. In the following tabu-
 
 5O Figures and Signs 
 
 lations, note the clearness and simplicity of the first 
 one: 
 
 Sept. 
 
 Sept. 
 
 16 
 
 IOO 
 
 #16 
 
 Hammers 
 
 
 
 $i 
 
 60 
 
 $160 
 
 oo 
 
 18 
 
 50 
 
 14 
 
 Chisels 
 
 
 2 
 
 oo 
 
 IOO 
 
 oo 
 
 21 
 
 25 
 
 7 
 
 Drills 
 
 
 3 
 
 50 
 
 87 
 
 50 
 
 25 
 
 IO 
 
 9 
 
 Picks 
 
 
 3 
 
 00 
 
 30 
 
 oo 
 
 27 
 
 IOO 
 
 3 
 
 Locks 
 
 
 I 
 
 25 
 
 125 
 
 00 
 
 29 
 
 90 
 
 2 
 
 Hinges 
 
 
 i 
 
 oo 
 
 90 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 $592 
 
 50 
 
 16, 
 
 IOO 
 
 #16 
 
 Hammers 
 
 @. 
 
 $i 
 
 .60 
 
 $160. 
 
 00 
 
 18, 
 
 50 
 
 #14 
 
 Chisels 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 .00 
 
 IOO. 
 
 oo 
 
 21, 
 
 25 
 
 # 7 
 
 Drills 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 .50 
 
 87. 
 
 50 
 
 25, 
 
 IO 
 
 #9 
 
 Picks 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 .00 
 
 30. 
 
 oo 
 
 27, 
 
 IOO 
 
 # 3 
 
 Locks 
 
 @ 
 
 i 
 
 25 
 
 125. 
 
 oo 
 
 89, 
 
 90 
 
 # 2 
 
 Hinges 
 
 @ 
 
 i 
 
 .00 
 
 90. 
 
 oo 
 
 12.50
 
 THE POSSESSIVE CASE. 
 
 The sign of the possessive case is the apostrophe 
 and 5 ('s). In some instances the 5 is dropped and 
 the apostrophe used alone, as when a plural noun 
 ends in s. 
 
 Examples: Henry's book; men's lives; birds' nests. 
 
 The apostrophe alone, without the additional s, 
 is sometimes used in the singular number, when the 
 noun ends in a sibilant (as s, c, or x), to avoid bringing 
 together too many hissing sounds; as, "Moses' 
 law," "for righteousness' sake," "for conscience' 
 sake," "the executrix' sale." The best authorities 
 sanction the use of both forms, and it is entirely 
 correct to write "Moses's law," "Burns's poems." 
 
 If the omission of 5 from the possessive singular 
 cause ambiguity, it should invariably be added; as, 
 "the fox's tail" (not "the fox' tail"). 
 
 Plural nouns ending in s take the apostrophe alone ; 
 as, "bees' wings," "ladies' hats." 
 
 The apostrophe is not used with pronouns to denote 
 possession. 
 
 Examples: Its, yours, his, theirs, hers, etc., not it's, your's, etc. 
 
 In compound nouns the sign of the possessive is 
 added to the last word only. 
 
 Examples: My brother-in-law's house; the heir-at-law's right. 
 51
 
 52 THe Possessive Case 
 
 The possessive form for a firm is, "Smith & Jones's 
 store," "Brown & Co.'s plant." 
 
 Where the possession is several, and not joint, the 
 sign of possession follows each noun; as, "men's and 
 women's hats. " 
 
 Where two nouns are in apposition, put the sign of 
 possession on the last; as, "We visited Smith the 
 clothier's family." 
 
 A noun or pronoun modifying the meaning of a 
 verbal noun must be put in the possessive case. 
 
 Examples: There was no fea/ of his (not him) betraying the 
 confidence. 
 
 I was surprised at John's (not John) refusing to go. 
 There was no need of my remaining (not me remaining). 
 She spoke about our coming to visit her (not us coming). 
 
 "Somebody else's book," or "Somebody's else 
 book"? 
 
 Both Century and Standard Dictionaries favor the 
 first form, or placing the apostrophe and 5 after else. 
 Century says: "The phrases anybody else, some- 
 body else, nobody else, etc., have a unitary meaning, 
 as if one word, and properly take a possessive case 
 (with the suffix at the end of the phrase) ; as "This is 
 somebody else's hat; nobody else's children act so." 
 
 The Standard Dictionary says: "The expressions 
 some one else, any one else, every one else, etc., are in 
 good usage treated as substantive phrases and have 
 the possessive inflection upon the else; as, somebody 
 else's umbrella. " 
 
 A "go-day note," or a "90 days' note"? 
 
 "A QO-day note, ""a ten-year note," are con- 
 sidered good commercial English, having been estab- 
 lished by general usage. But note that the following 
 forms require the sign of the possessive : " A six weeks'
 
 Double Possessives 53 
 
 note," "a two months' session," "a three weeks' 
 visit." 
 
 Although possession is in many cases by good 
 authority allowed to inanimate objects, it is better to 
 use the preposition in expressions like the following: 
 "The value of copper" (not "copper's value"); 
 "the laws of heat" (not "heat's laws"). 
 
 How to Affix the Sign of the Possessive to A bbreviations: 
 
 (Singular possessive) (Plural possessive) 
 
 Bro.'s Bros.' 
 
 (as, " Nye & Bro.'s store) 
 Co.'s Cos.' 
 
 Assn.'s Assns.' 
 
 DOUBLE POSSESSIVES. 
 
 Literary usage has long accepted double possessives 
 like the following: 
 
 A picture of my brother. 
 
 A picture of my brother's. 
 
 These expressions do not mean the same thing. 
 The first does not denote possession, but means 
 "the picture is a likeness of my brother." The 
 second does denote possession, and means, "the 
 picture belongs to my brother." 
 
 Care should be used in employing single or double 
 possessives, according to the meaning to be conveyed.
 
 PLURALS. 
 
 The following rules governing the formation of 
 plurals are given, in substance, in Bain's Grammar 
 and in Maxwell's "Advanced Lessons in English." 
 Standard Dictionary also is authority for the forms 
 given. 
 
 i. The plural is formed, with few exceptions, by 
 adding 5 to the singular. 
 
 If the attached 5 makes an additional syllable, 
 place an e before it ; as, box, box-es. 
 
 The puzzling words are those ending in o. Some 
 of these words form the plural by the addition of s, 
 and others by the addition of es. 
 
 The most common of these words are the following: 
 
 alto 
 
 altos 
 
 embryo embryos stiletto stilettos 
 
 bamboo 
 
 bamboos 
 
 folio folios solo solos 
 
 bravo 
 
 bravos 
 
 octavo octavos tyro tyros 
 
 cameo 
 
 cameos 
 
 oratorio oratorios virtuoso virtuosos 
 
 canto 
 
 cantos 
 
 portfolio portfolios zero zeros 
 
 duodecimo duodecimos quarto quartos 
 
 The following words form the plural by the addition 
 of es: 
 
 echoes 
 
 mulattoes 
 
 mottoes 
 
 negroes 
 
 potatoes 
 
 buffalo 
 
 buffaloes 
 
 echo 
 
 calico 
 
 calicoes 
 
 mulatto 
 
 cargo 
 
 cargoes 
 
 motto 
 
 domino 
 
 dominoes 
 
 negro 
 
 flamingo 
 
 flamingoes 
 
 potato 
 
 
 
 54
 
 Plurals 55 
 
 hero heroes tomato tomatoes 
 
 manifesto manifestoes tornado tornadoes 
 
 mosquito mosquitoes volcano volcanoes 
 
 2. Nouns ending in y preceded by a vowel form 
 the plural by the addition of s to the singular form: 
 
 attorney attorneys monkey monkeys 
 
 chimney chimneys money moneys 
 
 buoy buoys turkey turkeys 
 
 donkey donkeys valley valleys 
 
 There is another form for the plural of money, 
 viz., monies, but this is now seldom used. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in y preceded by a consonant 
 form the plural by changing y to i and adding es: 
 
 ally allies mercy mercies 
 
 berry berries fly flies 
 
 dairy dairies 
 
 4. The plural of compound words, whether 
 hyphened or solid, is formed by inflecting or pluraliz- 
 ing the principal word of the compound: 
 
 mother-in-law mothers-in-law 
 
 brother-in-law brothers-in-law 
 
 major-general major-generals 
 
 footman footmen 
 
 man-of-war men-of-war 
 
 aide-de-camp aides-de-camp 
 
 A few titles composed of two nouns in apposition 
 have both nouns inflected for the plural. 
 
 Knight Templar Knights Templars 
 
 Lord Justice Lords Justices 
 
 Lord Provost Lords Provosts
 
 56 Plurals 
 
 Man servant is changed to men servants. 
 
 Some nouns have the same form for both singular 
 and plural number; as, swine, hose, sheep, meat, deer, 
 fish, heathen, cannon. 
 
 Names of game-birds and of fish seldom form a 
 plural, the singular form being used to designate any 
 number; as, He shot twelve grouse; We caught six 
 pike. 
 
 When the parts of a compound word are so closely 
 allied that the meaning is not complete until the 
 whole word is known, the s is added at the end of 
 the word; as, cupfuls, handfuls. 
 
 Standard Dictionary says: "Nouns ending in 
 ful form the plural by a terminal s; as, pailfuls, etc. 
 The form cupsful is not in accordance with the rule 
 for the formation of plurals. Cups full is correct 
 for 'more than one cup, each being full.' >! 
 
 A few nouns are used only in the plural form. The 
 most common of these are scissors, snuffers, tongs, 
 trousers, shears, tweezers, bellows, dregs, measles, tid- 
 ings, victuals, spectacles, belles-lettres. These words 
 require a plural verb; as, "These scissors are dull." 
 
 Still another class of nouns form their plurals in 
 an irregular manner; as, beef, beeves; die, dice; staff, 
 staves; wharf, wharves; half, halves; etc. 
 
 PLURALS OF FOREIGN WORDS. 
 
 When words taken from foreign languages have 
 passed into common use, the plural is formed in the 
 regular way. During the process of becoming Angli- 
 cized, however, two plural forms are generally current, 
 either of which may be correctly used. The most 
 common of these words are contained in the following 
 list:
 
 Plurals 
 
 57 
 
 (Singular form.) 
 apex 
 appendix 
 automaton 
 bandit 
 beau 
 cactus 
 cherub 
 chrysalis 
 emporium 
 encomium 
 focus 
 formula 
 helix 
 index 
 iris 
 
 medium 
 memorandum 
 scholium 
 seraph 
 stigma 
 virtuoso 
 
 (English plural.) 
 apexes 
 appendixes 
 automatons 
 bandits 
 beaus 
 cactuses 
 cherubs 
 chrysalises 
 emporiums 
 encomiums 
 focuses 
 formulas 
 helixes 
 indexes 
 irises 
 mediums 
 memorandums 
 scholiums 
 seraphs 
 stigmas 
 virtuosos 
 
 (Foreign plural.) 
 apices 
 appendices 
 automata 
 banditti 
 beaux 
 cacti 
 
 cherubim 
 chrysalides 
 emporia 
 encomia 
 foci 
 
 formulas 
 helices 
 indices 
 irides 
 media 
 memoranda 
 scholia 
 seraphim 
 stigmata 
 virtuosi 
 
 The following foreign importations still retain the 
 foreign plural form: 
 
 addendum 
 
 addenda 
 
 datum 
 
 data 
 
 administratrix 
 
 administratrices 
 
 desideratum 
 
 desiderata 
 
 amanuensis 
 
 amanuenses 
 
 diaeresis 
 
 diasreses 
 
 analysis 
 
 analyses 
 
 dictum 
 
 dicta 
 
 animalculum 
 
 animalcula 
 
 effluvium 
 
 effluvia 
 
 antenna 
 
 antennae 
 
 ellipsis 
 
 ellipses 
 
 antithesis 
 
 antitheses 
 
 emphasis 
 
 emphases 
 
 arcanum 
 
 arcana 
 
 ephemera 
 
 ephemerae 
 
 axis 
 
 axes 
 
 erratum 
 
 errata 
 
 bacterium 
 
 bacteria 
 
 esophagus 
 
 esophagi 
 
 basis 
 
 bases 
 
 facetia 
 
 facetiae 
 
 chateau 
 
 chateaux 
 
 genius 
 
 genii 
 
 crisis 
 
 crises 
 
 genus 
 
 genera 
 
 criterion 
 
 criteria 
 
 gymnasium 
 
 gymnasia
 
 58 Plurals 
 
 hypothesis 
 lamina 
 larva 
 
 hypotheses 
 laminae 
 larvae 
 
 phenomenon phenomena 
 polypus polypi 
 radius radii 
 
 Magus 
 mausoleum 
 metamorphosis 
 miasma 
 
 Magi 
 mausolea 
 metamorphoses 
 miasmata 
 
 sarcophagus sarcophagi 
 spectrum spectra 
 stimulus stimuli 
 stratum strata 
 
 minutia 
 momentum 
 nebula 
 
 minutiae 
 momenta 
 nebulae 
 
 synopsis synopses 
 synthesis syntheses 
 terminus termini 
 
 nucleus 
 
 nuclei 
 
 thesis theses 
 
 oasis 
 
 oases 
 
 tumulus tumuli 
 
 octopus 
 parenthesis 
 
 octopi 
 parentheses 
 
 vortex vortices 
 
 There are few proper nouns ending in man which 
 form the plural in the regular way, by the addition 
 of 5 to the singular; for example, Mussulman, Mussul- 
 mans; Ottoman, Ottomans; Turkoman, Turkomans. 
 
 The words Chinese, Japanese, Tyrolese, etc., are 
 the same in the singular and plural, for both the 
 nation and the individual. 
 
 Plurals of Foreign Words in Common Use: 
 
 Alumna a woman who has been graduated from an institution 
 
 of learning. 
 
 Alumnae plural of alumna, women graduates. 
 Alumnus a man who has been graduated from an institution 
 
 of learning. 
 Alumni plural of alumnus, men graduates. 
 
 FAMILY NAMES. 
 
 Plurals of family names are formed by the addition 
 of 5 or es. 
 
 Jones Joneses Mclntyre Mclntyres 
 
 Griggs Griggses McCann McCanns 
 
 "In the reign of the Charleses" 
 "All the Joneses were there.
 
 TITLES. 
 
 Titles, as used in business correspondence, may be 
 divided into three classes as follows: 
 
 Official titles, or those belonging to an office. These 
 include titles applicable to officers in military, naval 
 and civil service. 
 
 Social titles, or titles of courtesy and respect, 
 including Mr., Mrs., Madam, Mesdames, Miss, Master, 
 Esquire. 
 
 Scholastic titles, or degrees conferred by colleges 
 or other institutions of learning. 
 
 Official titles should not be abbreviated in a cere- 
 monious letter or note. When an official title is very 
 long it may be shortened by giving a distinctive 
 portion of it in full, without abbreviating any of the 
 words, and indicating the remainder by "etc., etc." 
 
 Social titles are in many instances abbreviated and 
 scholastic titles are nearly always abbreviated. 
 
 Honorable is a title given by courtesy to almost 
 everyone who holds or has held an important public 
 office. It is especially bestowed upon the Vice-Presi- 
 dent of the United States, upon members of Congress, 
 members of State Legislatures, Judges, from the Chief 
 Justice of the United States down, upon Cabinet 
 Officers, State and Territorial Governors and Lieu- 
 tenant-Governors, Heads of Departments of Govern- 
 ment and Federal Officials, Ministers to foreign
 
 60 Titles 
 
 countries who have not a more distinctive title, and 
 Mayors. 
 
 Official letters may be addressed with propriety to 
 the office rather than to the officer; as, "To the 
 Secretary of State, Washington, D. C." 
 
 Letters to officers in the Civil Service are properly 
 addressed as follows: 
 
 (The President of the United States.} 
 
 The President, Executive Mansion, Washington, 
 
 D. C. 
 Salutation, Mr. President: or Sir: 
 
 The extreme of formality is embodied in the follow- 
 ing form: 
 
 His Excellency, the President of the United States, 
 Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C. 
 
 Salutation, Your Excellency: 
 
 The Complimentary Closing may be simply, 
 "Very respectfully yours." 
 
 (The Vice-President of the United States.} 
 
 Honorable , Vice-President of 
 
 the United States, Washington, D. C. 
 Or, To the Vice-President of the United States, 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 Sir or Dear Sir. 
 
 (Cabinet Officers.) 
 The Honorable the Secretary of the Treasury, 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 Honorable A B , Secretary of the 
 
 Treasury, Washington, D. C.
 
 Official Titles 6l 
 
 Or, simply, 
 
 Secretary of the Treasury, Washington, D. C. 
 Salutation, Sir, or Dear Sir. 
 Closing, Very respectfully yours. 
 
 (Members cf Congress.} 
 Hon. John Bell, Senate Chamber, Washington, 
 
 D. C. 
 
 Hon. John Bell, M. C., Washington, D. C. 
 Hon. John Bell, House of Representatives, Washing- 
 ton, D. C. 
 Sir, or Dear Sir. 
 
 (Foreign Ministers.) 
 
 His Excellency, , Ambassador to the 
 
 Court of St. James, London, England. 
 Your Excellency, or Sir. 
 
 (Governors.) 
 His Excellency, the Governor of New York, Albany^ 
 
 N. Y. 
 
 His Excellency, the Governor, Albany, N. Y. 
 His Excellency Governor S. M. Smith, Albany, 
 
 N. Y. 
 Your Excellency, or Sir. 
 
 (Mayors.) 
 
 Honorable , Mayor of New York City. 
 
 Sir, or Dear Sir. 
 
 (State Officers.) 
 
 The Honorable Attorney-General of New York, 
 Albany, N. Y. 
 
 Honorable , Attorney-General of New 
 
 York, Albany, N. Y. 
 Sir, or Dear Sir.
 
 62 Titles 
 
 (Legislative Bodies, Courts, etc.) 
 
 Petitions and like communications to organized 
 bodies may be addressed to the President of the body 
 or to the body itself. 
 
 To the Honorable the Senate of the United States in 
 
 Congress Assembled. 
 Honorable Sirs, or Sirs. 
 
 The Honorable the President of the Senate of the 
 United States. 
 
 Honorable , President of the Senate of the 
 
 United States. 
 Honorable Sir, or Sir. 
 
 The Honorable the Speaker of the House of Repre- 
 sentatives, Washington, D. C. 
 Mr. Speaker, or Sir. 
 To the Honorable Judges of the Court of Appeals, 
 
 Albany, N. Y. 
 Sirs. 
 
 A Board, Council or Committee may be formally 
 addressed as follows: 
 
 To the President and Members of the Board of 
 
 Education, Chicago, 111. 
 Sirs. 
 Or, : , Esq., President of the Board of 
 
 School Commissioners, Philadelphia, Pa. 
 
 The envelopes should bear practically the same 
 form of address in each of the cases here exemplified. 
 
 The following are the principal scholastic degrees 
 conferred by educational institutions. The abbrevia- 
 tions are affixed to individual names.
 
 Forms of Address for tKe Clergy 63 
 
 Bachelor of Arts, 
 Bachelor of Divinity, 
 Bachelor of Laws, 
 Bachelor of Medicine, 
 Bachelor of Philosophy, 
 Bachelor of Science, 
 Civil Engineer, 
 Doctor of Dental Medicine, 
 Doctor of Dental Surgery, 
 Doctor of Divinity, 
 Doctor of Laws, 
 Doctor of Medicine, 
 Doctor of Philosophy, 
 Dynamical Engineer, 
 Master of Arts, 
 Master of Laws, 
 Mechanical Engineer, 
 Professor of Divinity, 
 
 B.A. or A.B. 
 
 B.D. 
 
 LL.B. 
 
 M.B. 
 
 Ph.B. 
 
 B.S. or S.B. 
 
 C.E. 
 
 D.M.D. 
 
 D.D.S. 
 
 D.D. 
 
 LL.D. 
 
 M.D. 
 
 Ph.D. 
 
 D.E. 
 
 M.A. or A.M. 
 
 M.L. 
 
 M.E. 
 
 S.T.P. (Sancta Theo- 
 logies Pro- 
 fessor.) 
 
 THE CLERGY 
 Forms of Address and Salutation. 
 
 Reverend (or Rev.) is prefixed to the names of all 
 clergymen of the Methodist Church, including 
 Bishops. 
 
 Reverend should not be put before the surname only. 
 If the initials are unknown, the proper form is "Rev, 
 Mr. Smith." 
 
 In strict propriety the title Reverend should have 
 the definite article "the" prefixed in referring to 
 clergymen in speech or writing, the phrase being
 
 64 Titles 
 
 adjectival ; as, the Rev. Mr. Smith, or the Reverend John 
 Smith. 
 
 The title Reverend Dr. may be prefixed to names 
 of men entitled to the degree, but in such case the 
 initials D.D. should not be affixed. 
 
 In the Jewish Church every ordained minister is 
 called "Rabbi" and in this country is addressed as 
 Reverend. 
 
 The following forms are proper in addressing letters 
 to clergymen of the Episcopal Church : 
 
 (Bishops.) 
 
 Right Reverend , D.D., Bishop of . 
 
 Salutation, Right Reverend Sir. Or, Right Rev. 
 and dear Sir. 
 
 (Rector, Minister, Priest.) 
 
 Rev. J. B. , Rector of 
 
 Church, Boston, Mass. 
 
 Rev. Dr. J. B. , 14 State Street 
 
 Boston, Mass. 
 Salutation, Sir. Reverend Sir. Rev. and dear Sir. 
 
 ROMAN CATHOLIC TITLES AND FORMS OF 
 ADDRESS. 
 
 The letters denote: (a) the address of the letter, 
 (&) the salutation, (c) the complimentary close. 
 
 (.4 Cardinal.) 
 
 (a) I. To His Eminence Cardinal F , Arch- 
 bishop of -. 
 
 2. His Eminence the Most Reverend Cardinal 
 F .
 
 Roman CatKolic Titles 65 
 
 (5) i. Most Eminent Sir. 
 
 2. Most Eminent and Most Reverend Sir. 
 (c) I have the honor to be, Your Eminence, 
 
 Very sincerely yours, 
 
 (An Archbishop.} 
 
 (a) i. Most Reverend Archbishop C . 
 
 2. Most Reverend A C , Arch- 
 bishop of . 
 
 (6) i. Most Reverend and Respected Sir. Or, 
 2. Most Reverend and dear Sir. 
 
 (c) I. I am, Most Reverend Sir, 
 
 Very respectfully yours, 
 
 D C . 
 
 (A Bishop.} 
 
 (a) i. Right Reverend Bishop C . 
 
 2. Right Reverend A C , Bishop 
 
 of . 
 
 (6) I. Right Reverend Sir. 
 
 2. Right Reverend and dear Sir. 
 
 3. Right Reverend and dear Bishop, 
 (c) We are, Right Reverend Sir, 
 
 Very respectfully yours, 
 
 D C . 
 
 (Prelates and Apostolic Prothonotaries.} 
 
 (a) I. Right Reverend Monsignor C 
 2. Right Reverend A C 
 
 3. Right Reverend Monsignor C , Pro- 
 
 thonotary Apostolic, etc.
 
 66 Titles 
 
 (6) I. Right Reverend Sir. 
 
 2. Right Reverend Monsignor. 
 (c) i. I am, Right Reverend Sir, 
 
 Very respectfully yours, 
 
 U ~~~~ \s 
 
 (.4 Vicar-General, Canon, Dean, Prior, Rector, Head of 
 Religious Order, Head of College, Seminary.} 
 
 (a) I. Very Reverend A C (with 
 
 official title). 
 (&) I. Very Reverend Sir. Or, 
 
 2. Very Reverend and dear Sir. 
 (c) I. Very respectfully yours. 
 
 (Priest.) 
 
 (a) i. Reverend A : C 
 
 2. Reverend Father C 
 
 (&) i. Reverend Sir. Or, 
 
 2. Reverend and dear Sir. 
 
 (c) i. Very respectfully yours. 
 
 Heads of religious orders of women are addressed 
 generally : 
 
 Rev. Mother (family name or name in 
 
 religion) , Superior of . 
 
 Or, Mother M B , Superior of . 
 
 Salutation, Rev. Mother, or Dear Reverend Mother. 
 If name is wholly unknown, The Reverend Mother 
 Superior, Sisters of Charity, 9 West looth Street, 
 New York City.
 
 Usage in Addressing Two Persons 67 
 
 The usage in addressing envelopes to two persons is: 
 
 His Excellency and Mrs. James Smith. 
 Governor and Mrs. James Smith. 
 Honorable and Mrs. James Smith. 
 Rev. Dr. and Mrs. James Smith. 
 Professor and Mrs. James Smith. 
 Mr. and Mrs. James Smith.
 
 COMPOUND WORDS. 
 
 Compound words are composed of simple words of 
 independent significance. These simple words are 
 sometimes consolidated and sometimes united by a 
 hyphen. 
 
 When to write the words separately, when to con- 
 solidate, and when to unite by a hyphen are often 
 vexing questions. Why must book-buyer be written 
 with a hyphen and bookseller without? Few diction- 
 aries give rules and the examples are conflicting and 
 unsatisfactory. Modern usage, and especially busi- 
 ness usage, favors the shorter method of consolidation 
 and the elimination of the hyphen. This is to be noted 
 in words of frequent use, such as to-day, to-morrow, 
 counter-claim, and the like, which, although hyphened 
 in the dictionaries, are often consolidated in business 
 letters, in legal documents and in newspapers. 
 
 The following general principles are taken from 
 Standard Dictionary's department of Compound 
 Words, edited by Mr. F. Horace Teall, author of a 
 well-known book on this subject: 
 
 I. All words should be separate when used in 
 regular grammatical relation and construction, 
 unless they are jointly applied in some arbitrary 
 way. 
 
 68
 
 Compound Words 69 
 
 II. Abnormal association of words generally 
 indicates unification in sense, and hence compound- 
 ing in form. 
 
 III. No expression in the language should be 
 changed from two or more words into one 
 (either hyphened or solid) without change of 
 sense. 
 
 According to the first of these principles, an adjec- 
 tive (including all words used with clear adjectival 
 force) and a noun in regular use must not be joined ; as, 
 spinal column, brick house, fellow citizen, man servant, 
 brother officer. 
 
 Also, a regular adverb must not be joined to the 
 adjective which it modifies, even when the two express 
 one attribution ; as, highly colored wings, recently pub- 
 lished book. 
 
 The following specific rules are compiled in part 
 from Standard Dictionary and in part from Wilson's 
 Treatise on Punctuation. 
 
 1. Join by a hyphen two or more words abnor- 
 mally associated to express one attribute; as, "a 
 down-stairs room;" "a well-known man;" "North- 
 American birds;" "a silk-and-cotton fabric;" "free- 
 trade doctrines;" "dark-brown hair." 
 
 2. When one of two words, used together as a 
 single part of speech, is in such use not placed in 
 accordance with a rule of grammar, it should be 
 joined by a hyphen to the word used in connection 
 with it; as, "to go down-town;" "to halter-break a 
 horse;" "after-ages;" "broad-mindedly." 
 
 3. Use a hyphen in every name that shows mere 
 ellipsis and inversion of a phrase containing two 
 nouns; as, a "box for a hat, " inverted, is a "hat-box. "
 
 7O Compound Words 
 
 So with shoe-box, collar-box, hair-brush, cook-stove, 
 card-rack, and the like. 
 
 A box for marbles is a marble-box, but a box 
 made of marble is a marble box two separate words. 
 A house in which glass is made is a glass-house; a 
 house made of glass is a glass house. 
 
 4. Two nouns used together as one specific 
 name should be joined by a hyphen; as, sea-gull, 
 field-mouse, arch-stone, brick-yard. 
 
 But where the first of the two nouns is used in 
 the sense of an adjective, no hyphen is required ; as, 
 brick house, feather bed, pumpkin pie, cylinder press, 
 companion picture. 
 
 5. Possessive phrases used as specific names or 
 attributes are compound words and require the 
 hyphen; as, Jew's-harp; bird's-eye view. 
 
 6. When two or more words are necessary to 
 form a complete modifier, they should be joined by 
 a hyphen; as, "a matter-of-fact man;" "an I-told- 
 you-so tone;" "so-called roses;" "the above-named 
 defendant. " 
 
 When, however, phrases like these follow the 
 noun which they modify, no hyphen is used; as, 
 "roses so called;" "the defendant above named." 
 
 7. When two words of the same part of speech 
 are connected by the word "and," the three words 
 forming an adjective, place a hyphen between the 
 parts; as, "a black-and-tan dog;" "an up-and-down 
 answer. " 
 
 8. When a compound modifier has a numeral 
 and a noun, unite them by a hyphen; as, "a ten- 
 acre lot;" "a 6-inch rope;" "Ten-cent fares were 
 charged. " 
 
 9. When two adjectives precede a noun and the
 
 Prefixes and Suffixes 71 
 
 first belongs to the second adjective rather than to 
 the noun, join the adjectives by a hyphen; as, "a 
 strong-armed man ; " "a red-haired boy . " 
 
 10. Nouns formed of a verb and an adverb or a 
 preposition, or of a present participle and a noun, 
 require the hyphen; as, "a send-off;" humming- 
 bird, printing-press, dwelling-house. 
 
 11. Two numerals expressing a compound num- 
 ber are joined by a hyphen; as, thirty-three, seventy- 
 five. 
 
 But if these numerals are inverted and a conjunc- 
 tion placed between them, no hyphen is required; 
 as, three and thirty; five and seventy. 
 
 12. Fractions are compounded: three-eighths; 
 eleven-twelfths. 
 
 13. Points of the compass are usually written as 
 one word; as, northeast; but when one of the words 
 is repeated, use the hyphen; as, north-northeast. 
 
 14. Civic and military titles composed of two or 
 more words require the hyphen; Attorney-General; 
 Major-General; Sergeant-at-arms. 
 
 15. A hyphen is used in such phrases as "a 
 half -pint," "a quarter-dollar;" but when a preposi- 
 tion or an article intervenes no hyphen is required ; 
 as, " half a pint;" "quarter of a dollar." 
 
 PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES. 
 
 Un, out, pre. These prefixes are united to proper 
 nouns and proper adjectives by a hyphen; as, un- 
 American ; out-Herod ; pre-Columbian. 
 
 Man, men, keeper, master, house, room, boat, book, 
 side, yard, shop, mill, work, maker, holder, mate and 
 time are usually consolidated with a preceding noun if
 
 72 Compound 'Words 
 
 of one syllable; but united to it by a hyphen if of 
 more than one syllable ; as, schoolhouse; senate-house; 
 bedroom ; composition-room ; daytime ; dinner-time. 
 
 Inter and trans are prefixed without the hyphen. 
 Interstate ; transatlantic ; transalpine. 
 
 Proper nouns and proper adjectives to which trans 
 is prefixed drop the capital letter. 
 
 All is joined to an adjective modifier by a hyphen; 
 as, all-essential; all-merciful. When compounded 
 with another word without the hyphen, all drops one 
 // as, always, Almighty, although. 
 
 Re, co, in, out, sub, up, down, over, under, mid, after, 
 extra, counter, are usually prefixed without a hyphen; 
 as, restate; overdrawn; undervalue; sublet. 
 
 A hyphen is required when any of these words is 
 prefixed to a proper noun or a proper adjective. 
 
 Re and co are joined by a hyphen to words beginning 
 with a vowel; co-operate; re-install. 
 
 Under, when indicating rank or position, is properly 
 joined by a hyphen; as, under-secretary ; under-officer, 
 under-servant. 
 
 Fold, penny. The usual practice is to consolidate 
 these words with words of one syllable and to unite 
 them by a hyphen to words of more than one syllable; 
 as, fourfold; fifteen-fold; thirty-five-fold; threepenny; 
 fifteen-penny. 
 
 Pence is consolidated with numerals of one syllable, 
 but is separated from numerals of more than one 
 syllable; as, twopence; fifteen-pence. 
 
 Self and Jialf, when prefixed, require a hyphen; as, 
 self-reliance; self-taught; half -hourly; half -holiday; 
 half-back. 
 
 Birthday is written without the hyphen ; birth-rate 
 and birth-hour with the hyphen.
 
 Prefixes and Suffixes 73 
 
 Cross and counter, in legal documents, are joined by 
 a hyphen; as, cross-action, cross-bill, cross-examina- 
 tion, cross-question, cross-interrogatory, cross-remain- 
 der; counter-claim, counter-complaint. 
 
 First-rate, second-class, second-hand, used as modi- 
 fiers, require the hyphen. 
 
 Anybody, everybody, somebody, nobody, indicating 
 persons, are written as one word. The phrases any 
 body, every body, some body, refer to inanimate objects. 
 
 Something, everything, anything, are written as 
 single words, though it is proper to write any one, 
 every one, etc. 
 
 Non is joined by a hyphen; non-resident; non- 
 essential. 
 
 Post, when it means after, or behind, requires no 
 hyphen. Postscript; postgraduate. 
 
 Post, relating to the transportation of mail-matter, 
 is consolidated in postmaster, postman, but hyphened 
 in post-horse, post-office, post-free. 
 
 Compounds ending with like are usually written as 
 one word; as, workmanlike, businesslike. 
 
 But when this brings similar consonants together, 
 the hyphen is necessary ; as, shell-like, owl-like. 
 
 Like is joined to some proper nouns by a hyphen ; 
 Eve-like. 
 
 When a prefix ends with a vowel and the word with 
 which it is combined begins with a vowel, the hyphen 
 usually is placed between ; pre-eminent ; co-operate. 
 
 Vice is usually joined by a hyphen; as, vice-presi- 
 dent ; vice-principal ; vice-chancellor. But in viceroyal, 
 viceroyalty, vicegerent, vicegerency, it is consolidated. 
 
 Semi, inter, ultra, anti, ante. These prefixes are 
 usually consolidated, except before proper nouns and 
 proper adjectives; as, semiannual; semicircumference;
 
 74 Compound Words 
 
 interocean ; interstate ; ultramontain ; ultrafashionable ; 
 semi-Saxon, semi-Aryan, inter- Asiatic, ultra-Catholic. 
 
 Pseudo, quasi. These prefixes are joined by a 
 hyphen; pseudo-critic; pseudo-Christianity; quasi- 
 contract ; quasi-corporation. 
 
 Pseudo enters into many medical terms, with which 
 it is combined without the hyphen. 
 
 Ex, when used to express past office, is joinsd to 
 the noun by a hyphen; as, ex-mayor; ex-President 
 Harrison.
 
 CAPITALIZATION. 
 
 1. Sentence. The first word of every independ- 
 ent sentence or its equivalent should begin with a 
 capital letter. 
 
 Example: "Apply yourself to study: it is the only way to 
 success." 
 
 NOTE. While the last part of this example is a complete 
 sentence, it is a dependent sentence, and hence should not 
 begin with a capital. 
 
 2. Quotation. The first word of every direct 
 quotation should begin with a capital letter. 
 
 Example: It has been said of Bacon, "He it was who first 
 employed the well-known phrase, 'the wisdom of our ances- 
 tors. ' " 
 
 NOTE. When the quotation is brought in indirectly or is 
 introduced by the conjunction "that," it should begin with a 
 small letter; as, It has been well said that "time is the great 
 healer. " 
 
 3. Question, etc. The first word of a direct ques- 
 tion or of an important statement,' introduced into 
 another sentence, should begin with a capital letter. 
 
 Example: The important questions for us to consider are, 
 What are we here for? Whither are we drifting? 
 
 I would say this: If we do not bring suit by Monday we 
 shall lose our claim. 
 
 75
 
 76 Capitalization 
 
 4. Poetry. The first word of every line of poetry 
 should begin with a capital letter. 
 
 Example: "I know not if the dark or bright 
 
 Shall be my lot; 
 
 If that wherein my hopes delight 
 Be best or not. " 
 
 NOTE. But where a line of poetry is so long as to require 
 dividing, the portion carried over to the next line should not 
 begin with a capital. 
 
 Example: "The Star Spangled Banner to me is 
 
 the best; 
 
 Since the words are befitting the tune 
 does the rest. " 
 
 * 
 
 5. Deity. Every name or title of the Deity should 
 begin with a capital letter; as, the Creator, Father, 
 Preserver; the Eternal, the All- wise; the Holy Spirit; 
 the Messiah, the Anointed; the Master; the Judge 
 of the world. 
 
 The word "god, " meaning a heathen divinity, or 
 idol, begins with a small letter. 
 
 The words "providence" and "heaven," when 
 synonymous with Deity, should begin with a 
 capital; as, "Trust in Providence." 
 
 Pronouns referring to the Deity begin with a 
 capital only when they are equivalent to the name 
 of the Deity. This includes He and Him, Thee and 
 Thou, but not who; as, "Hear Thou the cry of one 
 far spent. " "The eye of Him who never sleeps. " 
 
 Words denoting the scriptures or sacred writings 
 of any nation or people begin with a capital letter; 
 as, the Bible, the Biblical story, the Holy Scriptures, 
 the Gospels, the Epistles, the Talmud, the Koran, 
 the Sacred Writings.
 
 Capitalization 77 
 
 Roman notation is usually written in capitals, but 
 citations from Scripture and other books may be 
 written in lower case; as, Vol. I, Part xvi; Chron. 
 xvi, 19; II Tim. xiii, 17-20. 
 
 6. The names of all religious sects and of all 
 political parties, whether derived from proper names or 
 not, and all adjectives and verbs derived from them, 
 should begin with a capital letter; as, The Catholic 
 Church; the Democratic party; the Radicals. 
 
 7. Titles, etc. Titles of books, tracts, essays, 
 newspapers, pictures, and the like, and titles of chap- 
 ters and sections, may be printed entirely in capitals; 
 if not, the first word and every noun, adjective, verb, 
 and adverb should begin with a capital. 
 
 Example: A Wild Ride of Two American Women Across 
 the Transvaal is an interesting tale. 
 
 In works treating of special subjects, important 
 words may be commenced with a capital for the 
 sake of emphasis or other purpose. This is a 
 matter of taste and judgment. 
 
 8. Official titles and all titles of honor and respect 
 when applied to particular persons, or preceding a 
 name, or occurring in familiar address, should com- 
 mence with a capital letter; as, Her Majesty, His 
 Honor, Your Royal Highness, Your Grace, President 
 Roosevelt, Governor Hamilton. 
 
 NOTE. The tendency of present usage is to drop the capital 
 from the pronoun in the examples given above.
 
 78 Capitalization 
 
 When these words occur frequently and without 
 any particular expression of honor, and are not 
 applied to a particular person, they may be written 
 with a small initial letter; as, "The pomp and cere- 
 mony of a king. " 
 
 In compound titles like Attorney-General, Vice- 
 President and the like, each word is commenced 
 with a capital. 
 
 Where a person has been specifically mentioned 
 by name and title and is afterward referred to by 
 title only, it should be capitalized; as, "General 
 Miles returned to the United States last week. The 
 General appears to be in good health." 
 
 When a title used alone is intended as a synonym 
 of a particular person it is generally capitalized ; as, 
 the Czar, the Pope, the Sultan. But when it is not 
 used as the appellation of a specified person the title 
 begins with a small letter; as, "A pope was elected. '' 
 
 When a title is used before or after a proper name 
 for the purpose of explanation, it does not begin 
 with a capital letter ; as, the prophet Jeremiah. 
 
 When the word "the" forms part of a corporate 
 name it should be commenced with a capital; as, 
 "We to-day ordered from The Chicago White Lead 
 Company two cans of paint. " 
 
 Ex prefixed to a title should not be capitalized 
 unless it begins a sentence; as, "The legislators 
 were addressed by ex-President Cleveland." 
 
 9. Proper Nouns. Every proper noun should 
 begin with a capital letter. 
 
 NOTE. This rule applies to the names of the months and the 
 days of the week. The names of the seasons are not capitalized 
 unless personified; as, "In the spring we planted corn."
 
 Capitalization 79 
 
 10. Proper Adjectives. Proper adjectives, or 
 words derived from proper nouns, should begin with 
 capital letters ; as, American, Grecian, Wesleyan. 
 
 NOTE. But when words derived from proper nouns have 
 lost their original significance, or are used to express a common 
 quality, the capital letter is no longer required; as, herculean, 
 from Hercules; platonic, from Plato; godlike. 
 
 11. / and 0. The pronoun I and the interjection 
 O should always be capitals. 
 
 Example: "All I ask is this: Save, O save me from the 
 candid friend. " 
 
 NOTE. The word "oh" does not begin with a capital except 
 when it is the first word of a sentence or of a line of verse; as, 
 "John came yesterday, and oh, how weary he looked!" 
 
 12. Personification. Nouns that represent inani- 
 mate things as persons should begin with a capital 
 letter. 
 
 Example: "Let the dead Past bury its dead." 
 NOTE. This rule applies to such words as the Muses,-thQ 
 Graces, the Fates, the Furies, etc. 
 
 13. Numbered Phrases, Tabulations, etc. The first 
 word of each of a series of numbered phrases or 
 clauses should begin with a capital letter. 
 
 Example: "The entire working force and capital of the 
 Company are to be employed for these purposes: I. In 
 rebuilding the plant and enlarging its capacity. 2. In improv- 
 ing the grade of the workmen. 3. In raising the standard of 
 the output." 
 
 In most cases, when the numbers are introduced 
 parenthetically, capitals are not necessary after 
 them, and periods are not placed after the numbers : 
 as, The Association has in view (i) the improvement
 
 So Capitalization 
 
 of the town, (2) the enlargement of the corporate 
 
 limits, and (3) the providing of comfortable homes 
 
 for laborers. 
 
 The first word of each line and also the chief items 
 of an account, bill of particulars, or tabulation should 
 begin with a capital. 
 
 Example: The expenses of the trip are here shown: 
 
 For Railroad Fare, $20 
 
 " Lodging, 25 
 
 " Advertising, 25 
 
 $70 
 
 To 6 Ibs. Tea, $9.00 
 
 " 8 Ibs. Sugar, i.oo 
 
 $10.00 
 
 14. In rules and reports of societies, committees, 
 etc., and in official publications by a city, the words 
 city, club, etc., and names indicating office should 
 begin with a capital letter; as, President, Vice-Presi- 
 dent, Secretary, Treasurer, Chairman, Directors, 
 Board of Managers. Also, when specifically referring 
 to the subject under consideration, the words report, 
 corporation, society, etc., should begin with a capital. 
 
 It is usual to capitalize the first word after an 
 introductory word or clause written entirely in capi- 
 tals, though the custom is by no means uniform. 
 
 Examples: RESOLVED, That this Committee urge an 
 appropriation. 
 
 AND BE IT FURTHER ENACTED, That the members of 
 the convention thus duly elected, etc. 
 
 In toasts, capitalize the principal words before the 
 dash and the first word following it.
 
 Capitalization Si 
 
 Example: "My Country: May it ever be right; but right 
 or wrong, my country!" 
 
 15. Special and important words that denote an 
 important event, epoch or object, or division of time, 
 should commence with a capital letter : as, the Middle 
 Ages, the Dark Ages, the Renaissance, the Constitu- 
 tion, the Bill of Rights, the Civil War, the Reign of 
 Terror, the Revolution, the Reformation, the Fourth 
 of July. 
 
 1 6. In botany and zoology, names of classes, 
 families and genera begin with capitals. Names of 
 species are written with a small initial unless formed 
 from a proper name. 
 
 Examples: In the United States the chipmunk is the com- 
 mon species of the Tamias striatus. 
 
 Magnolia grandiflora; The common prickly-pear (Opuntia 
 vulgaris) has yellow flowers. 
 
 The names of the different courts should begin with 
 a capital letter; as, the United States Supreme Court, 
 the County Court, the Criminal Court. 
 
 Usage varies in writing the letters A.M. and P.M., 
 referring to the time of day. It is not incorrect to use 
 small letters, but capitals are preferable. 
 
 A capital letter should follow the colon when the 
 latter is equivalent to "as follows;" as, "Write it: 
 Seven pairs at $3 a pair. " 
 
 The words father, mother, brother, sister, cousin, 
 aunt, etc., begin with a capital when put before a 
 proper name; as, Aunt Helen, Brother Jones, Cousin 
 James. When the words are used in a general sense, 
 a small initial letter is proper; as, "My mother was 
 here yesterday."
 
 82 Capitalization 
 
 The term "father, " when applied to a clergyman or 
 to the early writers of the Christian church, is begun 
 with a capital letter; as, "Even the writings of the 
 early Fathers are not free from controversy." 
 
 The words day, holiday, etc., used with a proper 
 name, generally begin with a small letter; as, Christ- 
 mas day ; the Easter holidays. 
 
 The word Satan should begin with a capital. 
 
 The word devil, when applied to a personal being 
 supposed to be the incarnation of evil, should begin 
 with a capital letter; as, the Devil and his angels. As 
 a general term for any demon, it begins with a small 
 letter. 
 
 Names from foreign languages, containing a preposi- 
 tion or an adjective, as von, van, de or di, le, la, etc., 
 when given without a title or a baptismal name, 
 should be written with a capital letter for the preposi- 
 tion or adjective ; as, Van Tromp, Von Humboldt, De 
 Thou, De la Fort, Di Cesudia; D'Estes; written with 
 the Christian name, the preposition or the adjective 
 takes a small initial letter; as, Simon de Montfort; 
 Jean de Vere; Henri de la Monte. 
 
 GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES. 
 
 Begin with a capital: 
 
 1. The words North, South, East, Northeast, etc., 
 when they denote sections of country; not when they 
 denote direction merely; as, The great Northwest; 
 There is great prosperity in the West; Ohio is east of 
 Illinois. 
 
 2. The words State, Territory, County, Colony, 
 Commonwealth, etc., preceding or following a specific
 
 GeograpHical Names 83 
 
 name; as, the County of Clinton, the State of Iowa, 
 Arizona Territory, Plymouth Colony, the Common- 
 wealth of Kentucky. 
 
 3. Each word of an appellation bestowed upon a 
 state or city; as, Keystone State, the Crescent City. 
 
 4. Terms applied to the natives of certain States 
 or regions; as, Hoosier, Yankee, Caucasian, etc.; 
 but not negro, gypsy, quadroon. 
 
 5. Each word which forms part of a specific name, 
 like Mississippi Valley, the Gulf Stream, Cape Cod 
 Bay. When the name of the object is a general term, 
 not specifically belonging to the thing mentioned, it 
 may begin with a small letter; as, the Mississippi 
 river; the Congo basin; the Catskill mountains. The 
 Great Basin, the Rocky Mountains, Long Island 
 Sound, require a capital for each word, because each 
 word is used specifically and forms part of the specific 
 appellation. 
 
 The terms arctic circle, antarctic circle, equator, 
 etc., do not denote real places, but only geographical 
 lines of position, and should not be capitalized.
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 The aim of punctuation is to make clear the writer's 
 meaning, to indicate grammatical construction and 
 the sense, to prevent ambiguity. The best of the art 
 is exemplified in the high class monthly magazines. 
 The trend of general usage is toward the newspaper 
 style open or "loose" methods of punctuation. 
 Commercial punctuation follows the medium path. 
 But as it requires as much knowledge to know when 
 a comma may be omitted safely as it does to place 
 it properly, it will hardly do to punctuate "by 
 instinct." 
 
 THE COMMA. 
 
 "Comma" means that which is cut off. The 
 Comma (,) indicates the slightest possible degree of 
 separation between the parts of a sentence. 
 
 It does not always indicate a pause, but often 
 merely a grammatical division, as in the expressions, 
 "Yes, sir, "and "No, sir." 
 
 Many of the rules which are given in books on 
 punctuation for the use of the comma are ignored in 
 commercial usage. 
 
 When in doubt, use the comma if it is necessary to 
 make the sense clear ; otherwise leave it out. 
 
 i. When two words, or a series of words, of the 
 same part of speech, are used in the same construc- 
 
 84
 
 THe Comma 85 
 
 tion, without a conjunction between them, a comma 
 separates them from each other. 
 
 Example : " Run, run to the village. " 
 
 When the words are nouns or expressions equiva- 
 lent to nouns, the comma is also placed after the 
 last when there is no conjunction before it; as, 
 "Flowers, trees, shrubs, adorned the grounds." 
 
 If the conjunction "and" be used before the last 
 word of the series, no comma follows the last word; 
 as, "Music, literature, and the drama form the 
 chief diversions of the family. " 
 
 The comma is put before the conjunction "and" 
 for the reason that the words "literature" and 
 "drama" are not more closely connected in sense 
 and construction with each other than with the 
 preceding word, "music." 
 
 When the series of nouns is preceded by an adjec- 
 tive qualifying only the first, the comma should be 
 omitted before the conjunction ; as " Delicate beauty, 
 lightness and strength characterize the Parthenon. " 
 
 When the first of two words connected by and, or, 
 or nor is qualified by a preceding adjective or adverb 
 which does not apply to the second, or when the 
 second word is followed by a word or phrase not 
 belonging to the first, a comma is placed before the 
 conjunction; as "The house was strongly built, and 
 supplied with modern articles." "He sang, and 
 danced too." 
 
 2. When the word "or" stands between two 
 nouns or between expressions which are synonymous, 
 or of which one is explanatory of the other, they may 
 be separated by a comma.
 
 86 Punctuation 
 
 Example: "The osprey, or sea-eagle, builds its nest high." 
 
 3. A comma separates the parts of a compound 
 sentence when the separation is too slight to require 
 the semicolon. 
 
 Example: "The night was dark and stormy, but the moon 
 finally struggled through the clouds. " 
 
 4. When a dependent clause precedes the principal 
 clause, it is set off by a comma, unless the two are 
 closely related in sense. 
 
 Example: " If you would accomplish a great work, let your 
 purpose not falter. " 
 
 When the dependent clause follows the main 
 clause and is closely connected with it in sense, it 
 need not be set off by a comma; as, "I will find you 
 the book if you wish it. " 
 
 5. A comma is put before a relative clause when it 
 is explanatory of the antecedent, or presents an addi- 
 tional thought. 
 
 Example : "Take the Hudson River boat, which sails at ten 
 o'clock. " 
 
 If the relative clause is restrictive in character, 
 the comma is omitted; as, "Take the Hudson River 
 boat that sails at ten o'clock. " 
 
 6. Words used in direct address are set off by 
 commas. 
 
 Examples: "John, you will find the study of geology very 
 interesting. " 
 
 " Continue, my son, to be diligent. " 
 
 7. The comma often takes the place of words 
 omitted.
 
 THe Comma 87 
 
 This is the case where two subjects in a compound 
 sentence have only one verb. 
 
 Example : " The wise man considers what he lacks ; the fool, 
 what he abounds in. " 
 
 8. A short quotation, or an expression resembling 
 a quotation, is preceded by a comma. 
 
 Example : " He merely said, ' I believe wheat is a profitable 
 crop.' ". 
 
 9. Words, phrases, and clauses of an explanatory, 
 parenthetical or intermediate character should be set 
 off by commas. 
 
 Example: "Johnson, you remember, wrote Rasselas." 
 
 10. Phrases having a common dependence on 
 another that follows them in the same clause are 
 separated by a comma. 
 
 Example: "Great men are seldom in sympathy with, but 
 are in opposition to, popular customs and beliefs. " 
 
 11. Words or phrases contrasted with each other 
 are separated by a comma. 
 
 Example: "He was a great writer, but not an orator." 
 
 When a negative word or phrase is put before an 
 affirmative one and does not commence the sen- 
 tence, a comma separates the phrases from each 
 other and also from the rest of the sentence; as, 
 "The greatest injury arises to the tenant, not from 
 the sale of the realty, but from the destruction 
 of the personalty. " 
 
 12. Words in apposition, with their adjuncts, are 
 separated by a comma.
 
 88 Punctuation 
 
 This includes titles, which should be separated by 
 a comma from the name and also from each other. 
 
 When the noun or pronoun in apposition stands 
 alone or has only an article before it, no comma is 
 required. 
 
 Examples : Millet, one of the greatest of modern painters, 
 was a native of France. 
 
 The painter Millet was a man of genius. 
 
 I myself will go. 
 
 James Jones, Esq.; Rev. Silas Brown, D.D., LL.D. 
 
 13. When the first of two nouns in apposition is 
 in the possessive case, a comma is placed between 
 them. 
 
 Example: "You can buy it at Smith's, the bookseller." 
 
 When the second of the two nouns in apposition 
 is in the possessive case, the comma may usually be 
 omitted; as, "You can buy it at Smith the book- 
 seller's." 
 
 When the first of these terms contains several 
 names, the comma is necessary before the word 
 containing the apostrophe; as, "You can buy the 
 book at Smith, Brooks & Company, the book- 
 sellers'." The better construction is, "You can 
 buy the book at Smith, Brooks & Company's, the 
 booksellers." 
 
 14. A comma is put after the name of a book or 
 play when it is followed by chapter and page, act, 
 scene, etc. 
 
 Example: " Romeo and Juliet, Act II, Scene 3." 
 15. Adjectival, participial, independent, and abso-
 
 THe Comma 89 
 
 lute phrases are separated by a comma from the rest of 
 the sentence. 
 
 Examples: "True to his promise, the general at once 
 ordered the release of the soldier. " 
 
 "Generally speaking, a good man is a brave man. " 
 
 Phrases before which a restrictive relative pro- 
 noun is understood should not be separated by a 
 comma from the rest of the sentence; as, "The 
 politician at the mercy of the voters cannot be 
 absolutely confident." 
 
 1 6. Adverbs and adverbial phrases that modify 
 clauses or whole sentences and do not readily coalesce 
 with the text are followed by a comma. When used 
 as connectives, or intermediately, a comma precedes 
 as well as follows them. 
 
 The following words and others of similar charac- 
 ter come under this rule: Again, once more, why, 
 -well, first, at least, consequently, in general, at 
 present, in the meantime, etc., etc. 
 
 When any of these or like words modify single 
 words, the comma may be omitted; as, "He was 
 again notified to be present. " 
 
 When an adverbial word or phrase comes between 
 two phrases or clauses, it is separated by a comma 
 from that expression only which it does not qualify; 
 as, "He suffered, for a few days at least, the mortifi- 
 cation of seeing his efforts fail." In this sentence 
 the adverbial phrase "at least" is not preceded by a 
 comma. 
 
 Used adverbially, yesterday, to-day, to-morrow, 
 now, indeed, etc., are not separated by a comma 
 from the words with which they are connected.
 
 90 Punctuation 
 
 When placed at the end of a sentence, the conjunc- 
 tion too is not separated by a comma. 
 
 When therefore easily coalesces with the other 
 parts of the sentence it should not be separated by a 
 comma. 
 
 When used parenthetically it should be so 
 separated. 
 
 17. When a final phrase presents an additional 
 thought, or does not readily unite with the preceding 
 phrase or clause, the comma should be inserted before 
 it. 
 
 Example: "He will make a speech on Thursday, either at 
 City Hall or at Madison Square Garden. " 
 
 1 8. Words, phrases, and clauses of an antithetical 
 character should be set off by commas. 
 
 Example: "We did not hope for complete success, but only 
 that we might impress them with the fairness of our claim. " 
 
 19. When words or phrases are used in pairs, a 
 comma should be placed after each pair. 
 
 Example: "Sink or swim, live or die, survive or perish, 
 I give my hand and heart to this vote. " 
 
 20. Phrases and clauses transposed, or placed out 
 of their natural order, are separated by a comma from 
 the rest of the sentence. 
 
 Example: "To the conscientious man, there is no satisfac- 
 tion so great as that which comes from the performance of 
 good work. " 
 
 But when the phrase or clause, though out of its
 
 THe Comma 91 
 
 natural order, is closely connected with what 
 follows it, no comma is required; as, "The poor ye 
 have always with you. " 
 
 21. No comma or other pause-mark is admissible 
 between subject and predicate, except in the following 
 cases : 
 
 (1) When the subject is followed by an explanatory expres- 
 sion that requires to be set off by commas ; as, "Shakespeare, the 
 poet of humanity, says, 'Conceit in weakest bodies strongest 
 works. ' " 
 
 (2) When the subject consists of two or more nouns not 
 connected by a conjunction; as, "Courage, aspiration, enthu- 
 siasm, are prerequisite to great achievement. " 
 
 (3) When the subject ends and the predicate begins with 
 the same verb, or with two verbs of a like form; as, "Whatever 
 is, is right. " "They who hesitate, fail. " 
 
 (4) When the subject consists of a long clause, ending with 
 a noun or pronoun which is apt to be read so closely with tiie 
 predicate as to obscure the sense; as, "The great difficulty a 
 young man meets on entering business life, is the restraint 
 placed upon his ethical impulses. " 
 
 22. The items in a date line are separated by 
 commas. 
 
 Example: "Chicago, 111., May 27, 1907." 
 
 23. With the exception of dates, numbers consist- 
 ing of more than three characters are pointed by the 
 comma into groups of three figures each, beginning at 
 the right or at the decimal point. 
 
 Example: 963,500,128; $546,734.34. 
 
 24. Proper names, when inverted, are separated by 
 a comma. 
 
 Example: John Jones, transposed, is written Jones, John.
 
 92 Punctuation 
 
 THE SEMICOLON. 
 
 The Semicolon (;) separates the parts of sentences 
 that are less closely connected than those separated by 
 commas. 
 
 1 . A semicolon should be placed between the parts 
 of a sentence when those parts are separated by 
 commas. 
 
 Example: "If you have talent, industry will improve it; 
 if you have none, industry will supply the deficiency. " 
 
 2. A semicolon separates from the main sentence 
 an explanatory or contrasting clause or sentence intro- 
 duced by but, for, and, therefore, or an equivalent word. 
 
 Examples: "It is an honor for a man to cease from strife; 
 but every fool will be meddling. " 
 
 "The night, now far advanced, was very disagreeable; for 
 the rain, which found us unprotected, fell in torrents." 
 
 3. A semicolon separates short sentences slightly 
 connected in sense or construction. 
 
 Examples: "God made the country; man made the town." 
 "Great Nature spoke; observant man obeyed; 
 Cities were formed; societies were made." 
 
 4. The semicolon separates a series of clauses having 
 a common dependence on a principal clause. 
 
 Example: "The prophet saw that men had forgotten 
 chivalry and honor; that each sought to hinder and oppress his 
 neighbor; that the whole world was struggling in mental dark- 
 ness." 
 
 5. The semicolon separates a series of particulars 
 when they consist of pairs of words, or of single words 
 or phrases but slightly connected.
 
 THe Semicolon 93 
 
 Examples: "The student of nature observes the relation- 
 ship between antithets; inside and outside; up and down; 
 light and darkness; heat and cold; bondage and liberty. " 
 
 "Logicians say the operations of the mind are three; namely, 
 I. Apprehension; 2. Judgment; 3. Reasoning." 
 
 6. A semicolon is put before as, viz., to wit, 
 namely, i.e., that is, and similar words, when they 
 introduce an example, a specification of particulars, a 
 quotation, or an illustration. 
 
 Examples: "The ancients recorded four great divisions of 
 time; viz., the golden age, the silver age, the brass age, and the 
 iron age. " 
 
 "By virtue is meant a particular moral excellence; as, the 
 virtue of temperance, charity, or patience." 
 
 When the specification is long use a comma before 
 the introductory word and a colon after it; as, "He 
 specified the various reasons for the shrinkage of 
 values, thus : Over-production, cessation of demand, 
 etc., etc." 
 
 But when as, namely, etc., with the terms follow- 
 ing them, are used parenthetically, they should be 
 preceded by a comma; as, "He specified the items, 
 namely, stocks, bonds and mortgages, which must 
 be considered first." 
 
 7. In market reports and other tabulated matter, 
 semicolons separate the items if the latter are long. 
 Commas are used if the items are short. 
 
 Examples: "Among the largest items on the list of United 
 States wares shipped to New Zealand were the following: 
 Boots and shoes, $405,555; flour, $131,680; hollow-ware and 
 ironmongery, $232,350; printing-paper, $227,775; kerosene oil 
 and other coal-tar products, $796,720." 
 
 "Other large items on the list are cartridges, firearms, 
 canvas, clocks, surgical instruments, etc. "
 
 94 Punctuation 
 
 8. "Yes" or "no," forming part of an answer and 
 followed by a clause, is usually separated by a semi- 
 colon. 
 
 Example: "Yes; an attempt was made to substantiate the 
 claim." 
 
 THE COLON. 
 
 The Colon (:) separates the parts of a sentence that 
 are less closely connected than those separated by a 
 semicolon. 
 
 1. A colon is placed between the parts of a sen- 
 tence whose clauses are separated by semicolons. 
 
 Example: "Every one must, of course, think his own 
 opinions right; for, if he thought them wrong, they would no 
 longer be his opinions: but there is a wide difference between 
 regarding ourselves as infallible, and being firmly convinced of 
 the truth of our creed. " 
 
 2. A colon should be placed after a clause that is 
 complete in itself, but is followed, without a conjunc- 
 tion, by some inference or illustration. 
 
 Examples: " It is not enough that we make laws: we should 
 obey them. " 
 
 "The telegram means simply this: You are expected to be 
 in Chicago by Monday. " 
 
 3. A colon is placed before a formal enumeration of 
 particulars. 
 
 Example: A letter contains six parts: first, the location and 
 date; second, etc.
 
 The Period 95 
 
 4. A colon is placed before a direct quotation 
 which is long, or contains several sentences. 
 
 Example: "Mr. Smith was introduced and spoke as 
 follows:" etc. 
 
 5. A colon is placed after such words and phrases 
 as thus, again, to conclude, once more, to sum up, 
 and similar terms, when placed at the beginning of 
 several sentences, to all of which they refer. 
 
 Example: "To sum up: The plaintiff, by his laches, has 
 forfeited his right to appeal. " 
 
 6. The colon separates hours, minutes, and seconds, 
 when given in figures. 
 
 Example: "At 9 : 45 the meeting adjourned." 
 
 7. A colon is placed after the salutation in letters. 
 
 Example: "Dear Mr. Meade: Your interesting letter of 
 yesterday is received. ; ' 
 
 8. On a title-page a colon is placed between the 
 name of the city and the name of the publishers. 
 
 Example: New York: Dodd, Mead & Co. 
 
 THE PERIOD. 
 
 1. The Period (.) is placed at the end of every 
 complete and independent sentence which is neither 
 interrogatory nor exclamatory. 
 
 Example: "Wit is frequently sharpened on the grindstone 
 of pain." 
 
 2. A period should be placed after every abbre- 
 viation. 
 
 Example: Supt., Gen. Mgr., Rev. Jas. Smith, D.D., LL.D.
 
 96 Punctuation 
 
 NOTE. Nicknames, and abbreviations used as nicknames, 
 are not followed by a period; as, Tom, Ben, Sue, Ed, Rob. 
 
 NOTE. When an abbreviation ends a sentence, only one 
 period is used to mark the omission of letters and the end of the 
 sentence. When the construction requires an exclamation- 
 point or an interrogation-point, the mark is placed after the 
 period; as, "He called for us this P.M." "Can you call for us 
 this P.M. ? " " We ordered several books shipped to Jones Bros. " 
 "Have you shipped the books ordered by Jones Bros.?" 
 
 NOTE. Words derived from a foreign language, used in 
 English as contractions and pronounced as such, may be 
 written without the period; thus, "Interest at the rate of six 
 per cent (abbreviation of centum) was charged." Such 
 words as isl, ^dly, idmo, 4(0, 8vo, etc., are not abbreviations 
 and should not be followed by a period. 
 
 3. A period should be placed after titles, headings, 
 signatures, etc. 
 
 A subtitle or subhead, at the beginning of a para- 
 graph, may be followed by a period and a dash. 
 
 Example: "INCREASED JAPANESE DUTIES. Before the 
 proposed increase in the Japanese duties can become effective, 
 it must be laid before the Diet. " 
 
 4. A period is placed after letters of the alphabet 
 used as numerals, and after figures used to number 
 paragraphs, etc. 
 
 Example: "The items were classified as follows: 
 
 a. Inspection of parcels. 
 
 b. Customs declarations. 
 
 c. Return receipts for parcels." 
 
 But when letters or figures are enclosed in marks of parenthe- 
 sis, no period is placed after them; as, "The kinds of letters are: 
 (l) Letters of friendship, (2) Letters of courtesy, (3) Letters of 
 business." 
 
 When letters of the alphabet are employed as signs, or for
 
 THe Period 97 
 
 reference, no period should follow them, and they are pointed, 
 when necessary, as ordinary words; as, "Let X equal 100. " 
 
 A period is usually placed after Roman numerals used as 
 figures; as, " George IV. " (read, George the Fourth). Gen. vii. 
 14, 1 8. In this use no comma is placed after the abbreviation 
 Gen. nor after the chapter. 
 
 When double letters are used to indicate the plural, as pp. for 
 pages, MM. for Messieurs, only one period is used. 
 
 5. A period is used to indicate a decimal fraction ; 
 as > 99-5 J an d also to separate figures representing 
 dollars from those representing cents; as, $5.95. 
 
 6. The name of an author is separated from an 
 extract from his writings by a period and a dash. 
 
 Example: 
 
 "There's not the smallest orb which thou beholdest, 
 But in his motion like an angel sings. " Shakspeare. 
 
 Several periods, called leaders, are employed to 
 direct the eye to a term or figure put at the end of 
 the line. In this case no point is placed imme- 
 diately after the last word before the leaders; as, 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Suffixes 12 
 
 Contractions 14 
 
 Punctuation 15 
 
 Several periods, spaced or not, are often employed 
 instead of stars to indicate an omission of letters or 
 words; as, "He was recalled ... on the charge of 
 neglect of duty." 
 
 A period should not be used after a word in which 
 the omission of letters is indicated by an apostrophe, 
 unless the word ends a sentence ; as, rec'd, ex'r.
 
 98 Punctuation 
 
 THE INTERROGATION-POINT. 
 
 1. The Interrogation-Point (?) is placed at the end 
 of every direct question. 
 
 Example: "Where are you going?" 
 
 Sometimes a sentence, affirmative in sense, is put, 
 for the sake of emphasis, in the form of a question. 
 In such case it is followed by an interrogation-point. 
 
 Example: "What could I not do in a year if I had all that 
 time to myself?" 
 
 2. The interrogation-point should be inserted im- 
 mediately after a question that introduces a remark 
 or a quotation. 
 
 Example: "Who has not heard this maxim? 'It is better 
 to rub than rust. ' " 
 
 3. A question introduced in the body of an affirma- 
 tive sentence takes the interrogation- point imme- 
 diately after it. 
 
 Example: "The great questions, 'What are we here for? 
 Whither are we drifting?' demand our most serious considera- 
 tion." 
 
 Sometimes a sentence is composed of a series of 
 questions which, if put in an affirmative form, would 
 be separated by commas or semicolons. In this case, 
 while a mark of interrogation is placed after each 
 question, a capital letter is not used to begin each 
 question. 
 
 Example: "To show my country's greatness, shall I refer 
 to her standing army? or to her navy? or to her railroads? 
 or would you rather hear about the homes of her people?" 
 
 Again, a series of interrogative sentences may be
 
 XHe Exclamation-Point 99 
 
 closely related, yet each be distinct in itself. In such 
 case each sentence begins with a capital letter and is 
 followed by an interrogation-point. 
 
 Example: "Is he wise? Is he genial? Is he sincere? Is 
 he sympathetic? Well, then, he is popular and influential. " 
 
 The interrogation-point must not be used after an 
 indirect question; as, "He asked me how many men 
 were there." 
 
 The interrogation-mark enclosed in marks of paren- 
 thesis expresses doubt. 
 
 Example: "His profound (?) wisdom excited laughter." 
 
 THE EXCLAMATION-POINT. 
 
 The Exclamation-Point (!) is placed after interjec- 
 tions, emphatic terms of address, and all words, 
 phrases, or sentences denoting emotion, impatience, 
 surprise, etc. 
 
 Examples: Oh! Ah! Pshaw! Too bad! Dreadful! 
 
 Friends, countrymen, and lovers! hear me for my cause. 
 
 John! come here immediately. 
 
 Hurrah ! The troops are coming. 
 
 When the emotion or passion belongs to the entire 
 phrase, clause, or sentence, the exclamation-point 
 should be placed at the close. 
 
 Examples: "Alas, that such a thing should happen!" 
 "Oh, it was pitiable!" 
 
 There is an essential difference between the inter- 
 jections and oh. The former is used in a direct 
 address and should not have the exclamation-point 
 immediately after it; as, " O friend, that I might fly!" 
 
 Oh sometimes takes the exclamation-point immedi- 
 ately after it and sometimes not, according to the
 
 ioo Punctuation 
 
 construction and sense of the expression in which it 
 occurs. Where the expression of feeling or emotion 
 is limited to the word oh, the mark should follow that 
 word; as, "Oh! Did you hear that sound?" 
 
 Where the emotion runs throughout the entire 
 clause or sentence, the exclamation-point closes the 
 sentence, the word oh being set off by a comma if it is 
 separable from the rest of the sentence; if not, no 
 mark should follow it. 
 
 Examples: Oh, saddest picture in the book of time! 
 Oh that men should put an enemy into their mouths to steal 
 away their brains! 
 
 When the same exclamatory word is repeated 
 rapidly a comma may be placed after all but the last ; 
 as, " Ha, ha, ha! It was a most amusing play. " "No, 
 no, no! That is not the way I told you." 
 
 Increasing emotion, wonder, surprise, irony, or con- 
 tempt may be indicated by increasing the number of 
 exclamatory marks; as, "Going! Going!! Gone!!!" 
 "Trust him!! I would rather trust any criminal in 
 prison." 
 
 The exclamation-point is sometimes used to imply 
 doubt or irony; as, "He said the brigand was a very 
 pious (!) man." 
 
 Whether a capital letter should begin the word 
 following the exclamation-point must be determined 
 by the closeness of the connection. In the following 
 examples the break is complete and it is proper to use 
 a capital letter after the first exclamatory expression : 
 "How now! What 's the matter?" "Bah! Give me 
 what is mine and I will go. " 
 
 The exclamation-point is made by holding down the 
 space-bar while striking the period and the apostrophe.
 
 MarKs of ParentHesis 101 
 
 MARKS OF PARENTHESIS. 
 
 Marks of Parenthesis, consisting of two curved lines 
 ( ), are used to enclose explanatory words, or expres- 
 sions which have little or no connection with the rest 
 of the sentence. 
 
 Strictly speaking, the parenthesis is the part inserted, 
 although the two curved lines are also called parenthe- 
 ses or a parenthesis. 
 
 1. If no point would be required between those 
 parts of a sentence in which a parenthesis occurs, none 
 should be used before or after the marks of parenthe- 
 sis; as, "That old house (you can see its chimney 
 through the trees) was built by Thomas Jefferson." 
 
 2. If a comma or any other mark is required where 
 the parenthetical words occur, it should be placed 
 after the last mark of parenthesis; as, "Judge Hazen, 
 at the request of Mr. Brown (defendant's counsel), 
 discharged the prisoner. " 
 
 3. When the parenthetical portion is interroga- 
 tive or exclamatory, the point required, if there were 
 no parenthesis, should be inserted before the first mark 
 of parenthesis, and the interrogation-point or exclama- 
 tion-point before the second mark of parenthesis; as, 
 "The committee, expecting a disagreement, (can you 
 not guess the reason?) postponed the conference." 
 
 4. When the main portion of the sentence is 
 interrogatory or exclamatory, and the parenthesis is 
 explanatory or affirmative, the interrogation-point or 
 exclamation-point is inserted before the first mark of 
 parenthesis, and the parenthetical portion is punctu- 
 ated as if no marks of parenthesis were used; as, "Ask
 
 IO2 Punctuation 
 
 not, Why are these things required? (that is, obedience, 
 temperance, and industry ;) but rather, comply readily 
 and cheerfully. " 
 
 5. When the parenthesis occurs at the end of a 
 sentence, the period, or whatever mark would be ap- 
 propriate if there were no parenthesis, is placed after 
 the last mark of parenthesis; as, "At the top of the 
 hill we overtook Dalton (the man who passed us in the 
 morning)." 
 
 6. Sometimes marks of parenthesis are used to 
 enclose an expression standing apart from the context, 
 added by way of explanation or in reference to some 
 other passage or book, or note, section, paragraph, 
 rule, or remark; as, "The learned author quoted 
 liberally from the Bible. (Book II, pages 75-150.)" 
 
 7. Marks of parenthesis are also used to enclose 
 figures or letters of the alphabet when enumerating 
 items or subjects or introducing paragraphs; as, "He 
 gave as reasons for his absence : (i ) That it had rained ; 
 (2) that he could get no conveyance; (3) that he was 
 delayed by an important lawsuit. " 
 
 8. Marks of parenthesis are also used to enclose: 
 
 (1) The name of a State or of a person not properly 
 belonging to the context, but necessary for clearness; 
 as, " He (Jefferson) was the foremost man of his time." 
 "The Omaha (Neb.) Bugle advocated Bryan." 
 
 (2) The interrogation-mark, expressing doubt; as, 
 "In 1892 (?) the great controversy over silver arose. " 
 
 (3) A number or an amount in figures when it is 
 also written in words; as, "The house was sold for 
 three thousand dollars ($3,000)."
 
 THe Dash 103 
 
 (4) Figures or letters used in tabulating, as in this 
 and the three preceding paragraphs. 
 
 Marks of parenthesis take the place of brackets in 
 typewriting, and are thus used to enclose words 
 inserted in or appended to a quotation, and not belong- 
 ing to it, as in giving an explanation, rectifying a 
 mistake, or supplying an omission; in reports of 
 speeches, to enclose expressions of approbation or 
 disapprobation made by an audience; in dramas, to 
 enclose directions to the players. 
 
 THE DASH. 
 
 The Dash ( ) indicates a sudden change in the 
 sense or the construction of a sentence. 
 
 It is usually made on the typewriter by two hyphens 
 (- -), with no space before or after it. Some very 
 artistic work, however, shows the dash made by a 
 single hyphen with a space each side. 
 
 Place a dash : 
 
 1. Where a sentence breaks off abruptly and the 
 subject is changed or takes an unexpected turn. 
 
 Example : Was there ever a bolder captain of a more valiant 
 band ? Was there ever but I scorn to boast. 
 
 2. Where the sense is suspended and is continued 
 after a short interruption. 
 
 Example: The roadway was covered with yellow sand 
 yellow is the imperial color of China and an entertainment 
 prepared. 
 
 3. Before a word or phrase repeated in an exclama- 
 tory or emphatic manner. 
 
 Example: You act like a lunatic, sir, like a lunatic, I say.
 
 104 Punctuation 
 
 4. Where there is an ellipsis of such words as 
 namely, that is, and others of similar import. 
 
 Example: The greatest names in English poetry are the 
 first we come to, Chaucer, Spenser, Shakspeare, and Milton. 
 
 5. Between a title, or a subhead, and the subject- 
 matter, and between the subject-matter and the 
 authority from which it is taken, when both are put 
 in the same line. 
 
 Examples: ACCENTS. There are three marks, termed accents, 
 placed over words. 
 
 I am never less alone than when alone. Rogers, Human 
 Life. 
 
 6. Where there is a long pause for rhetorical effect. 
 
 Example: "One other bitter drop to drink, 
 And then no more!" 
 
 7. Between a question and an answer, or the parts 
 of a dialogue, when run into a paragraph instead of 
 beginning separate lines. 
 
 Example: "Here is John again; what think you of that?" 
 "Oh, I expected him." "Well, why has he come?" 
 
 8. Before a summing up of particulars. 
 
 Example: The birds, the flowers, the bees, all answered 
 the call of Spring. 
 
 The dash, or a number of hyphens, is used to indi- 
 cate the omission of letters or figures. 
 
 Examples : Mr. B addressed the meeting. 
 
 The winter of 1898-99. 
 Luke xiv. 5-9. 
 
 If the parts of a sentence in which dashes occur are 
 susceptible of punctuation, the proper point should be
 
 TKe .Apostrophe 105 
 
 inserted before the dashes; as, "Can you go to-night, 
 I mean to the theatre, of course, provided I can 
 get seats?" In this sentence, if the part between the 
 dashes were omitted, the remaining parts, "Can you 
 go to-night, provided I can get seats?" require the 
 comma, hence the comma should be inserted before 
 each of the dashes. 
 
 When a parenthesis is introduced before a repeated 
 expression, the dash both precedes and follows the 
 marks of parenthesis. 
 
 Example: Go forth, then, Spirit of Christianity! (most 
 precious inheritance of the ages!) go forth to thy work of 
 reform. 
 
 THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 The Apostrophe denotes the omission of letters or 
 figures. It is used 
 
 1. To form plurals: " Dot your i's and cross your 
 t's. " " The y's and the Q'S were not made distinctly " 
 (instead of "7es" and "QCS"). 
 
 2. To form contractions: Isn't; o'clock (of the 
 clock). 
 
 A contraction in the possessive form, singular, has 
 the period before the s; as, "Brown & Co.'s plant was 
 burned. " 
 
 3. To show the omission of the century in dates; 
 as, '85 for 1885. 
 
 4. To show the possessive case: "For form's 
 sake. " " No one's business. " 
 
 A word pronounced in full should not be contracted 
 by the use of the apostrophe, except in headings of
 
 io6 Punctuation 
 
 columns, where the saving of room is necessary; as, 
 Cha's for Charles, Ap'l for April. 
 
 (For further suggestions as to the formation of the 
 possessive, see pages 51-53.) 
 
 THE HYPHEN. 
 
 The Hyphen (-) is used both to join and to separate. 
 It joins the parts of compound words, and divides a 
 word into syllables. It also indicates the division of a 
 word at the end of a line. 
 
 The hyphen is also used to distinguish a word that 
 is spelled like another word but differs in meaning and 
 pronunciation; as, recreation, re-creation. 
 
 The hyphen also separates two adjacent vowels 
 that do not form a diphthong; as, pre-eminent, co- 
 operate. 
 
 These uses of the hyphen are explained in detail in 
 the chapters on "Compound Words" and "Syllabi- 
 cation." 
 
 MARKS OF QUOTATION. 
 
 Marks of Quotation ( " " ) are used to show that 
 the words enclosed by them are the words of another 
 speaker or writer. 
 
 i. A word, phrase, or passage, belonging to 
 another, and introduced directly into one's own 
 composition, should be enclosed in quotation-marks. 
 
 Example : It was Pope who said, " O grant an honest 
 fame, or grant me none!" 
 
 NOTE. When a writer repeats his own language, in order to 
 draw particular attention to it, he encloses it in quotation- 
 marks.
 
 MarKs of Quotation 107 
 
 Example : In my letter of last week, you will remember 
 that I wrote, " Buy no mining stocks." 
 
 NOTE. Marks of quotation may be omitted where the 
 matter introduced is not given in the exact words of the author. 
 
 Example : In my letter of last week, you will remember that 
 I wrote you to buy no mining stocks. 
 
 Titles of books, newspapers, and newspaper articles, 
 names of plays, but not of the characters, names of 
 ships, etc., are usually enclosed in quotation-marks. 
 If the quotation-marks are omitted, the titles and 
 names should be underscored. 
 
 Examples : Many consider " Adam Bede" the bestof George 
 Eliot's books. 
 The steamer Prince Victor arrived to-day. 
 
 2. When one quotation is included within another, 
 the included quotation is enclosed by single quotation- 
 marks (i e., the apostrophe). 
 
 Example: "Let me here remind you," said the speaker, 
 " that he was a wise man who said, ' Let me write the ballads of 
 a nation and I care not who makes its laws.' " 
 
 NOTE. When the quotation which is included within 
 another also contains a quotation, the latter is enclosed 
 by double marks. 
 
 Example : " Mrs. Child says, ' He thus describes the closing 
 day: " Now Twilight lets her curtain down and pins it with 
 a star" which is certainly a pretty conceit.' " 
 
 If this quotation ended with the word "star," the 
 double, single, and double marks would appropriately 
 follow: ''Mrs. Child says, 'He thus describes the 
 closing day: "Now Twilight lets her curtain down 
 and pins it with a star." 
 
 Wilson in his Treatise on Punctuation says that in 
 some instances, as in quoting texts of Scripture, where 
 there are several quotations so involved one within
 
 loS Punctuation 
 
 another that the insertion of all the marks would tend 
 to obscure the meaning of the passage, the inner marks 
 may properly be omitted, and gives this remarkable 
 example: "In the New Testament we have the 
 following words: ' Jesus answered the Jews, " Is it not 
 written in your law, ' I said, " Ye are gods " '?" 
 To eliminate the numerous marks which disfigure the 
 passage, Wilson recommends the omission of all except 
 the opening marks and the first of the inner marks: 
 " In the New Testament we have the following words: 
 ' Jesus answered the Jews, Is it not written in your 
 law, I said, Ye are gods? ' " 
 
 3. When the matter quoted is composed of suc- 
 cessive paragraphs, each paragraph is preceded by 
 quotation-marks, but the marks are not placed at the 
 end of any of the paragraphs except the last one. 
 
 Example : " The meek enjoy the best values, have dominion 
 oy righteousness and service, by being the right kind of persons. 
 
 " Now, have we a better conception of this ideal character 
 than that which is expressed in the good word ' gentleman ' 
 the righteous, the honorable, the cultivated man ? 
 
 " We might almost say that the Christian conception of 
 character has passed from the ideal of the saint to the ideal of 
 the gentleman." 
 
 When the quoted matter occupies several lines, put 
 it in a separate paragraph, single space, and indent the 
 margins. 
 
 Example : The following telegram was received by us this 
 morning and transmitted according to instructions: 
 
 " Figures have been prepared by the railroads' 
 press bureau which are meant to show that the 
 proposed increase of freight rates is so small in its 
 effect on the consumer that it will not be felt."
 
 MarKs of Quotation 109 
 
 4. When particular attention is desired to be drawn 
 to a quoted passage embodied in the text of an article, 
 quotation-marks are placed at the beginning of each 
 line of the quotation; as, Trench well says, " What a 
 " lesson the word 'diligence' contains! How profit- 
 " able it is for every one of us to be reminded, as we 
 "are reminded when we make ourselves aware of its 
 "derivation from diligo, 'to love,' that the only 
 "secret of true industry in our work is love of that 
 "work!" 
 
 When an extract is not quoted in full, the sign 
 "&c" or the abbreviation "etc." which takes the 
 place of the omitted part should follow the quotation- 
 mark. 
 
 Example : As you know, he rusned in, in great agitation, 
 exclaiming, " The house is on fire," etc., and was off again 
 before we could question him. 
 
 When a dash follows a quoted passage to show that 
 the quotation is incomplete, the mark of quotation 
 follows the dash. 
 
 Example : He yelled excitedly, " I am not I need not say 
 that I am not " but the wind took away his voice and we 
 heard no more. 
 
 5. The period and the comma are always put be- 
 fore the closing quotation-mark. The colon, semicolon, 
 mark of interrogation, and mark of exclamation come 
 before or after the quotation-mark according to 
 whether or not the punctuation be a part of the matter 
 quoted. 
 
 Thus, when a direct question is quoted, the interro- 
 gation-mark is put before the quotation-mark. 
 
 Example: I was asked, "Will you stay for breakfast?"
 
 no Punctuation 
 
 What a. wonderful poem is Byron's "Apostrophe to the 
 Ocean"! 
 
 Can you understand the statement our teacher made yester- 
 day, that "all the nations of the earth are of one blood"? 
 
 It is not enough to say to a young man just entering business 
 life, "All is not gold that glitters"; but such instruction should 
 be given as will enable him to distinguish between gold and 
 tinsel. 
 
 Words or phrases specifically referred to, or used in 
 illustration, may be put in quotation-marks. 
 
 Example: The preposition "for" sometimes means "not- 
 withstanding," "in spite of." 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS MARKS. 
 
 The Caret ( A ) is placed below the line to show 
 where a word or other matter is to be inserted. It 
 is sometimes inverted and placed above the line. 
 
 fast 
 
 Example: "Send us by A freight loo yards of black rubber 
 tubing." 
 
 Marks of Ellipsis are used where letters or words 
 have been omitted. 
 
 These are sometimes a number of asterisks ( * * * ) 
 or periods ( . . . ) or x's ( x x x ) or a long dash 
 
 ( ) ; as, John F d (Fierund). "We will not 
 
 refer * * * to the several matters seriatim. " 
 
 The Section ( ) denotes the small divisions of a 
 chapter or a book. 
 
 . The Brace connects several names or items, to all of 
 which a following word or clause applies ; as, 
 John Morgan, } 
 Martin Greene, > Committee. 
 Lewis M. Kohn, )
 
 Accent III 
 
 The Ditto Mark ( " ) indicates that the words under 
 which it is placed are to be repeated. 
 
 Example: Oct. 12 To Railroad ties, $ 1,000 
 " 13 " " cars, 50,000 
 
 The Asterisk ( * ) is used to refer to footnotes or 
 marginal notes, and to indicate omissions. Figures 
 or letters of the alphabet, placed slightly above the 
 line, also refer to footnotes. 
 
 The Underline ( ) is a mark of emphasis or dis- 
 play. In preparing manuscript to be printed, one 
 line under words indicates italics; two lines, small 
 capitals; three lines, capitals. On the typewriter, 
 however, the various degrees of emphasis and display 
 are indicated as follows: 
 Hurrah! Hurrah! HURRAH! HURRAH! 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 Accent Marks are seldom made on the typewriter, 
 foreign words being written as ordinary English 
 words. When it is desired to indicate accent, the 
 Tilde may be made by the hyphen placed directly over 
 a letter; as, canon; the Cedilla, by the comma directly 
 under a letter; as, garcon (indicating c soft); the 
 Acute Accent by the apostrophe ; as, employe ; and the 
 Diaeresis by the double quotation-mark; as, zoology. 
 Such words as co-operation are now written with the 
 hyphen rather than with the diasresis.
 
 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 1. A diphthong, digraph, or triphthong must not 
 be divided, but must be treated as a single letter. 
 
 NOTE. A diphthong is a union of two vowels in one syllable, 
 both of which are sounded; as, ou in doubt, oi in oil. 
 
 A digraph is the union of two letters (vowels or consonants) 
 representing only one sound; as oo in boot, sh in she. 
 
 A triphthong is the union of three vowels in one sound; as 
 eau in beau, ieu in lieu, eye. 
 
 Exception: The double consonants, as ss t bb, nn, etc., are 
 
 divided. 
 
 2. Every syllable must contain one or more 
 sounded vowels. 
 
 3. Every vowel, diphthong, or triphthong which 
 is sounded makes a separate syllable. 
 
 Examples : El-e-gant, foi-ble, beau-ti-ful. 
 
 NOTE. Two or more vowels coming together and sounded 
 separately belong to separate syllables; as, joyous, a-or-ta, 
 pli-ant, pre-eminent. 
 
 4. Words pronounced as one syllable should not 
 be divided, even though they contain more than 
 one vowel; dreamed, marked, drowned, etc., should 
 be treated as one syllable. 
 
 5. Words should be so divided as to show their 
 correct pronunciation. 
 
 112
 
 Syllabication 113 
 
 Note that the words ma-jes-tic and maj-es-ty, frag-ile and 
 fra-gil-i-ty, pro-duce, prod-uce, and the like, are differently 
 divided according to pronunciation and emphasis. 
 
 6. The parts of a compound word which are 
 themselves English words with meanings recognized 
 in the compound are separated in syllabication. 
 
 Example: Pine-apple is preferable to pineap-ple, school- 
 master is preferable to schoolmas-ter. 
 
 7. Words of Latin and Greek origin are divided 
 according to sound; as, prac-ti-cal, con-do-lence, nec- 
 es-sa-ry, ne-ces-si-tate. 
 
 8. Separate a prefix or a suffix from the primitive 
 word if the pronunciation is not misrepresented 
 thereby. 
 
 Examples: Command-er, suit-able, fall-ing, dis-approve. 
 
 NOTE. Words like tra-cing are exceptions, as the pronuncia- 
 tion is better represented by dividing before c. 
 
 NOTE. The addition of a suffix sometimes changes the 
 syllabication by changing the accent; as, re-form, ref-or-ma- 
 tion. 
 
 NOTE. When the addition of a suffix causes the doubling 
 of the final consonant, the added consonant goes with the added 
 syllable; as, run-ner, spin-ning. 
 
 9. Double consonants are divided. 
 Examples: Let-ter, ac-cent, ab-bey. 
 
 10. Two or more consonants between two vowels 
 belong to the latter syllable provided they are capable 
 of beginning a word. 
 
 Examples: Sti-fle, de-stroy, lu-cre. 
 
 11. Two consonants which do not form a digraph 
 and are not capable of beginning a word, are divided. 
 
 Examples: Cer-tain, con-geal.
 
 114 Syllabication 
 
 12. When more than two consonants come be- 
 tween two vowels, the first of which is short, write 
 the first consonant with the first vowel and the 
 remaining consonants with the second vowel. 
 
 Examples: Blas-pheme, elec-tri-fy, dis-tress, a-pos-tro-phe. 
 
 But if two of the consonants form a digraph they must not 
 be separated; as, breth-ren. 
 
 13. After long vowels and unaccented short ones 
 the consonant or consonant combination goes with 
 the following syllable. 
 
 Examples: Mo-tive, de-press. 
 
 14. With few exceptions, the letters d, s, sc, t, and 
 z do not end syllables when they combine with the 
 following vowels and form the sound of sh, ch, zh, or .;'. 
 
 Examples: Re-la-tion, pre-science, con-science, lei-sure. 
 Exceptions: Right-eous, om-nis-cient. 
 
 But when these letters follow a short accented 
 vowel, they often end the syllable; as, nat-u-ral, ed-u- 
 cate, habit-ual, treas-ure. 
 
 Certain letters or combinations of letters in foreign 
 words, which form the sound of consonant y are kept 
 together in the same syllable ; as, imbro-glio, sera-glio, 
 co-gnac. 
 
 The letter x is written at the end of a syllable; as, 
 anx-ious, com-plex-ion. 
 
 Do not end a line with a syllable of but one letter; 
 as, a-broad, a-long, a-ble. 
 
 Do not, as a rule, divide words of only four or five 
 letters ; as only, upon.
 
 Syllabication 115 
 
 Do not begin a line with a, syllable of but one letter ; 
 as, cre-ation ; divide thus : crea-tion. 
 
 Exception: The syllable a in a-ble, following a 
 primitive.
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Abbreviations universally allowable are common 
 titles before proper names, scholastic degrees and 
 titles after names, initial letters indicating membership 
 in a society, and initials, used with figures to designate 
 a specific point of time. 
 
 The more common of such abbreviations are given 
 below : 
 
 Adjt. Adjutant. Maj. Major. 
 
 Adjt.-Gen. Adjutant-General. Maj.-Gen. Major-GeneraL 
 
 Aid. Alderman. M. Monsieur. 
 
 Brig. -Gen. Brigadier-General. Messrs. Messieurs. 
 
 Capt. Captain. Mile. Mdlle. Mademoiselle. 
 
 Col. Colonel. Mme. Madame. 
 
 Dr. Doctor. Mr. Mister. 
 
 Gen. General. Prof. Professor. 
 
 Gov. Governor. Rev. Reverend. 
 
 Gov.-Gen. Governor-General. Rt. Rev. Right Reverend, 
 
 Hon. Honorable. Sig. Signor. 
 
 Lieut., Lt. Lieutenant. Supt. Superintendent. 
 
 Lieut.-Gen. Lieutenant-General. 
 
 Lieut.-Col. Lieutenant-Colonel. 
 
 (Scholastic degrees and titles after names, etc.) 
 
 A.B. or B.A. Bachelor of Esq. Esquire. 
 
 Arts. LL.B. Bachelor of Laws. 
 
 A.M. or M.A. Master of LL.D. Doctor of Laws. 
 
 Arts. M.D. Doctor of Medicine. 
 
 B.D. Bachelor of Divinity. Ph.D. Doctor of Philosophy. 
 
 C.E. Civil Engineer. M.P. Member of Parliament. 
 
 D.D. Doctor of Divinity. M.C. Member of Congress, 
 
 116
 
 Abbreviations and Contractions 117 
 
 (Points of time.} 
 
 A.M. Forenoon. A.D. (Anno Domini) Year of 
 
 P.M. Afternoon. our Lord. 
 
 M. Noon. B.C. Before Christ. 
 
 Names of towns should not be abbreviated. 
 
 Titles may be abbreviated only when used with the 
 full name. They should be spelled in full when the 
 surname only is given. Gen. William T. Sherman; 
 General Sherman. 
 
 Christian names should be spelled in full or desig- 
 nated by initials, with very few exceptions, such as 
 Wm., Thos., etc. 
 
 Names of States and Territories should not be 
 abbreviated when used alone or when name of county 
 only and not name of city is given; as, The State of 
 New York lies east of New Jersey. Oswego County, 
 New York, borders on Lake Ontario. At Ossining, 
 N. Y., there is a famous prison. 
 
 The words north, south, east, and west should not be 
 abbreviated when they form part of a geographical 
 name; as, South Auburn (not So. Auburn); North 
 America (not No. America). 
 
 All words that can be abbreviated by the omission 
 of one letter only, should be written in full. Thus, 
 do not write Jno. for John, or Jul. for July. 
 
 Titles predicated of persons should be written in 
 full. Thus, "The Rev. George Campbell is a Doctor 
 of Divinity," not, "The Rev. George Campbell is a 
 D.D." 
 
 Books of the Bible, given with chapter and verse, 
 may be abbreviated. Gen. xxi, 7; Matt, v, 21. But 
 these words, used without reference to any particular
 
 Il8 Abbreviations and Contractions 
 
 verse or passage, should be spelled in full; as, The 
 Epistle of Timothy. In Genesis we read the story of 
 the creation. 
 
 When two words are abbreviated by the first letter 
 of each word, a period should follow each letter; as, 
 e.g. for exempli gratia. 
 
 The names of the months are abbreviated only in 
 dates, bills, statements, tabulated matter, etc. 
 
 May, June, and July should not be abbreviated 
 except where space is limited, in column-headings, 
 etc. 
 
 Months. 
 
 January, Jan. July, July. 
 
 February, Feb. August, Aug. 
 
 March, Mar. September, Sept. 
 
 April, Apr. 'October, Oct. 
 
 May, May. November, Nov. 
 
 June, June. December, Dec. 
 
 Days. 
 
 Sunday, Sun. Thursday, Thurs. 
 
 Monday, Mon. Friday, Fri. 
 
 Tuesday, Tues. Saturday, Sat. 
 Wednesday, Wed. 
 
 COMMERCIAL ABBREVIATIONS, SIGNS, AND 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Abst. Abstract Agt. Agent 
 
 Acct. or a/c Account Aid. Alderman 
 
 Acct. cur. Account cur- Amb. Ambassador 
 
 rent Am. America-n 
 
 Adm. Administrator Amt. Amount 
 
 Admx. Administratrix Anon. Anonymous 
 
 Ad. Advertisement Ans. Answer
 
 Abbreviations and Contractions 119 
 
 A.M. Ante meridiem (be- Brot. Brought 
 
 fore noon) Bldg. Building 
 
 Apr. April Bdl. Bundle 
 
 Asst. Assistant Bu. Bushel 
 
 Assn. Association B. 0. Buyer's option 
 Atty. Attorney 
 
 Atty.-Gen. Attorney- Can. Canada 
 
 General C. E. Canada East 
 
 Aug. August C. W. Canada West 
 
 Av. Average Cap. Capital 
 
 Ave. Avenue Capt. Captain 
 
 Ai. First class C/o Care of 
 
 @. To or at C.O.D. or c.o.d. Cash 
 
 (or collect) on delivery 
 
 Bal. Balance Cash. Cashier 
 
 Bk. Bank, book C. w.o. Cash with order 
 
 Bbl. bbls. Barrel, bar- Cat. Catalogue 
 
 rels C, c, Cent 
 
 Bkt. bkts. Basket, bas- Cert. Certif. Certificate 
 
 kets Ch. Chapter 
 
 Bet. Between Chgd. Charged 
 
 B/E Bill of Exchange Chgs. Charges 
 
 B/L Bill of Lading C. A. Chartered Account- 
 
 B/S Bill of Sale ant 
 
 B/P or Bs. pay. Bills Ck. Check 
 
 payable Chts. Chests 
 
 B/R or Bs. rec. Bills Ch. Clk. Chief Clerk 
 
 receivable C. J., Ch. J. Chief Jus- 
 
 Bor. Borough tice 
 
 Bot. Bought Cir. C. Circuit Court 
 
 Boul. Boulevard Cit. Citation 
 
 Bx. bxs. Box, boxes C. E. Civil Engineer 
 
 Bro. Bros. Brother, C. S. Civil Service 
 
 brothers Clk. Clerk
 
 I2O Abbreviations and Contractions 
 
 C. C. P. Code of Civil 
 
 Procedure 
 
 C. Cr. P. Code of Crim- 
 inal Procedure 
 Coll., coll. Collector, 
 
 collection 
 
 C. C. P. or Com. Pleas, 
 Court of Common 
 Pleas 
 
 Com. Commission, com- 
 mittee, commercial, 
 common 
 
 Comr. Commissioner 
 Co. Company, county 
 Cong. Congress, congres- 
 sional, congregational 
 Cons., consol. Consoli- 
 dated 
 
 Const. Constitution-al 
 Contr. Contract, con- 
 tractor 
 
 Cor. Coroner 
 Cor. Sec. Corresponding 
 
 Secretary 
 
 C. a. f . Cost and freight 
 C. i. f. Cost, insurance 
 
 and freight 
 C. C. County Court 
 C. H. Court House 
 Cr. Credit, creditor 
 Cwt. Hundredweight 
 Cyc. Cyclopedia 
 
 D/d Days' date 
 
 D/d Days after date 
 
 D/s Days' sight 
 
 Dr. Debtor, doctor, 
 
 dram. 
 
 Dec. December 
 Deft. Defendant 
 Deg. Degree 
 
 D. V. Deo volente (God 
 willing) 
 
 Dept. Department 
 Diet. Dictator, diction- 
 ary 
 
 Dis. Discount 
 Dist. District 
 -do- Ditto 
 
 Div. Dividend, division 
 Dol. Dollar 
 Doz. Dozen 
 Dft. Draft 
 
 Ea. Each 
 
 E. East 
 
 Ency., Encyc. Encyclo- 
 pedia 
 
 Eng. English, England 
 
 E. E. Errors excepted 
 
 E. & O. E. Errors and 
 omissions excepted 
 
 Et al. Et alii or alice 
 (and others) 
 
 Etc. Et cetera (and 
 other things) 
 
 Ex. Example 
 
 Exch. Exchange
 
 Abbreviations and Contractions 121 
 
 Ex. Com. Executive 
 Committee 
 
 E. g., ex. gr. Exempli 
 gratia (for example) 
 
 Exec., Exr. Executor 
 Exrx. Executrix 
 Exp. Expense 
 Ex. Express 
 
 Fahr. Fahrenheit 
 Feb. February 
 Ft. Feet or foot 
 Figs. Figures 
 Fol. Folio 
 For. Foreign 
 For'd Forward 
 
 F. o. b. Free on board 
 Frt. Freight 
 
 Fri. Friday 
 
 Gal., gals. Gallon-s 
 G/A General average 
 
 G. P. O. General Post 
 Office 
 
 Gr. or gro. Gross 
 Guar. Guaranty 
 
 Hdkfs. Handkerchiefs 
 Hhd. Hogshead 
 Hon. Honorable 
 H. p. Horse-power 
 Hund. or C. Hundred 
 
 Ib., ibid. Ibidem (in the 
 same place) 
 
 Id. Idem (the same) 
 
 i.e. Id est (that is) 
 
 In. Inches 
 
 Incl. Including, inclu- 
 sive 
 
 Incog. Incognito 
 
 Inc. Incorporated 
 
 Inst. Instant (present 
 month) 
 
 Inst. Institute 
 
 Ins. Insurance 
 
 Int. Interest 
 
 Int. Rev. Internal reve- 
 nue 
 
 Invt. Inventory 
 
 Inv. Invoice 
 
 I. O. U. I owe you 
 
 Isl. Island 
 
 Jan. January 
 
 Jour. Journal 
 
 Jour. fol. Journal folio 
 
 June. Junction 
 
 Jr. Junior 
 
 J. P. Justice of the 
 Peace 
 
 JJ. Justices 
 
 J. Prob. Judge of Pro- 
 bate 
 
 Jurisp. Jurisprudence 
 
 Ledg. Ledger 
 L. f. Ledger folio 
 L/C Letter of Credit
 
 122 Abbreviations and Contractions 
 
 Lirn. Limited 
 
 L. S. Locus sigilli (place 
 
 of the seal) 
 Lb., or . Pound 
 , s, d. (4, 3 s. 8d.) 
 
 Pounds, shillings, pence 
 
 Mme. (plu. Mmes.) 
 
 Madame 
 
 Mdlle., Mile. Mademoi- 
 selle 
 
 Mfg. Manufacturing 
 Mfrs. Manufacturers 
 Mfs. Manufactures 
 MS. (plu. MSS.) Manu- 
 script 
 
 Mar. March 
 Meas. Measure 
 M. C. Member of Con- 
 gress 
 
 Memo. Memorandum 
 Mdse. Merchandise 
 M. Meridies (noon) 
 Messrs., MM. Messieurs 
 M. E. Methodist Epis- 
 copal 
 
 Min. Minute 
 Misc. Miscellaneous 
 Mr. Mister 
 Mrs. Mistress 
 Mon. Monday 
 Mo. Month 
 Mt. (plu. Mts.) Moun- 
 tain, Mount 
 
 M. Thousand 
 
 Nat. National 
 
 N. G. No good 
 
 N. or No. North 
 
 No. Am. or N. A. North 
 
 America 
 
 N. E. Northeast 
 N. W. Northwest 
 N. B. Nota Bene (note 
 
 well) 
 
 N. P. Notary public 
 No. Number 
 
 Oct. October 
 
 O. K. All correct. (Hu- 
 morous spelling ' ' oil 
 korrect") 
 
 O. T. On time 
 
 O. T. or O/T On track 
 
 Oz. Ounce 
 
 Pkg. (plu. pkgs.) Pack- 
 age 
 
 P. (plu. pp.) Page 
 
 Pr. Pair 
 
 Pd. Paid 
 
 Pt. Part 
 
 Payt. Payment 
 
 Pk., pks. Peck, pecks 
 
 Pwt., or dwt. Penny- 
 weight 
 
 Per an. Per annum 
 
 Per cent. % Per centum.
 
 Abbreviations and Contractions 123 
 
 PCS. Pieces 
 
 Pt. Pint 
 
 PL Place 
 
 Plff., pltf. Plaintiff 
 
 P. M. Postmaster 
 
 P. M. G. Postmaster- 
 General 
 
 P.M. Post meridiem (af- 
 ternoon) 
 
 P. O. Post Office 
 
 P. S. Postscript (post 
 scriptum) 
 
 Pfd. or Pf. Preferred 
 
 Prem. Premium 
 
 Presb. Presbyterian 
 
 Pres. President 
 
 Pro tern. Pro tempore 
 (for the time) 
 
 P. J. Probate Judge 
 
 P. E. Protestant Episco- 
 pal 
 
 Prox. Proximo (next 
 month) 
 
 Pub. Publisher, publish- 
 ing 
 
 Qt., qts. Quart, quarts 
 Qr. Quarter 
 Q. M. Quartermaster 
 Q. Question 
 
 R. R. Railroad 
 
 Ry. Railway 
 
 Rec't or rect. Receipt 
 
 Rec. Sec. Recording 
 Secretary 
 
 Rec'd or reed. Received 
 
 Ref. Reference 
 
 Reg. Register, registrar 
 
 Rt. Hon. Right Honor- 
 able 
 
 Rt. Rev. Right Reverend 
 
 Rom. Cath. Roman 
 Catholic 
 
 R. F. D. Rural Free De- 
 livery 
 
 St. Saint, street 
 
 Sat. Saturday 
 
 Schr. Schooner 
 
 Sec. Secretary 
 
 Sec. Section, second 
 
 S. O. Sellers' option 
 
 Sr. or sen. Senior 
 
 Sess. Session 
 
 Shs. Shares 
 
 S. Shilling 
 
 Shipt. Shipment 
 
 S/D Sight draft 
 
 S. or so. South 
 
 S. E. Southeast 
 
 Sq. Square 
 
 Str. Steamer 
 
 S. S. or SS. Steamship 
 
 Sun. Sunday 
 
 Supt. Superintendent 
 
 Supp. Supplement 
 
 Sup. Ct. Supreme Court
 
 124 Abbreviations and Contractions 
 
 Ter. Territory 
 Thurs. Thursday 
 T. Ton 
 Tonn. Tonnage 
 Tp. Township 
 Treas. Treasurer 
 
 Ult. Ultimo (last) 
 
 Vs. or v. Versus (against) 
 V. P. or Vice-Pres. Vice- 
 President 
 
 Viz. Videlicet (to wit, 
 namely) 
 
 Vol. Volume 
 
 W/B (plu. W/Bs.) Way 
 
 bill 
 
 Wed. Wednesday 
 Wk. Week 
 Wt. Weight 
 W. West 
 Whf. Wharf 
 
 Xcp. Without coupon 
 Xd. Without dividend 
 
 Yd. Yard 
 Yr. Year 
 
 CONTRACTIONS COMMONLY USED. 
 
 Are not 
 Between 
 Do not 
 Does not 
 Even 
 
 Halfpenny 
 I am 
 I have 
 
 i win 
 
 I would 
 Is not 
 It is 
 It was 
 Let us 
 Madam 
 There is 
 They are 
 Was not 
 Were not 
 
 are n't. 
 
 'tween. 
 
 don't. 
 
 does n't. 
 
 e'en. 
 
 ha'penny. 
 
 I'm. 
 
 I've. 
 
 I'll. 
 
 I'd. 
 
 is n't. 
 
 'tis. 
 
 'twas. 
 
 let 's. 
 
 Ma'am. 
 
 there 's. 
 
 they 're. 
 
 was n't. 
 
 were n't.
 
 Abbreviations and Contractions 125 
 
 STATES AND TERRITORIES AND THEIR 
 CAPITALS. 
 
 The abbreviations given in the second column are 
 those recognized as official by the Post Office Depart- 
 ment, the abbreviations appearing in parenthesis 
 being those sometimes used by newspapers. 
 
 State 
 
 Alabama 
 
 Alaska 
 
 Arizona 
 
 Arkansas 
 
 California 
 
 Colorado 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 Delaware 
 
 District of Columbia 
 
 Florida 
 
 Georgia 
 
 Hawaii 
 
 Idaho 
 
 Illinois 
 
 Indiana 
 
 Iowa 
 
 Kansas 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 Louisiana 
 
 Maine 
 
 Maryland 
 
 Massachusetts 
 
 Michigan 
 
 Minnesota 
 
 Mississippi 
 
 Missouri 
 
 Montana 
 
 Nebraska 
 
 Nevada 
 
 New Hampshire 
 
 Abbreviation 
 
 Ala. 
 
 Alaska 
 
 Ariz. 
 
 Ark. 
 
 Cal. (Calif.) 
 
 Colo. (Col.) 
 
 Conn. 
 
 Del. 
 
 D. C. 
 
 Fla. 
 
 Ga. 
 
 Hawaii 
 
 Idaho (Ida.) 
 
 EL 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Iowa (la.) 
 
 Kans. (Kan.) 
 
 Ky. 
 
 La. 
 
 Me, 
 
 Md. 
 
 Mass. 
 
 Mich. 
 
 Minn. 
 
 Miss. 
 
 Mo. 
 
 Mont. 
 
 Nebr. (Neb.) 
 
 Nev. 
 
 N. H. 
 
 Capital 
 
 Montgomery 
 
 Juneau 
 
 Phoenix 
 
 Little Rock 
 
 Sacramento 
 
 Denver 
 
 Hartford 
 
 Dover 
 
 Washington 
 
 Tallahassee 
 
 Atlanta 
 
 Honolulu 
 
 Boise" 
 
 Springfield 
 
 Indianapolis 
 
 Des Moines 
 
 Topeka 
 
 Frankfort 
 
 Baton Rouge 
 
 Augusta 
 
 Annapolis 
 
 Boston 
 
 Lansing 
 
 St. Paul 
 
 Jackson 
 
 Jeff ei-son City 
 
 Helena 
 
 Lincoln 
 
 Carson City 
 
 Concord
 
 126 Abbreviations and Contractions 
 
 State 
 
 Abbreviation 
 
 Capital 
 
 New Jersey 
 
 N.J. 
 
 Trenton 
 
 New Mexico 
 
 N. Mex. (N. M.) 
 
 Santa Fe* 
 
 New York 
 
 N.Y. 
 
 Albany 
 
 North Carolina N. C. 
 
 Raleigh 
 
 North Dakota 
 
 N. Dak. (N. D.) 
 
 Bismarck 
 
 Ohio 
 
 Ohio (O.) 
 
 Columbus 
 
 Oklahoma 
 
 Okla. 
 
 Oklahoma 
 
 Oregon 
 
 Oregon (Ore.) 
 
 Salem 
 
 Pennsylvania 
 
 Pa. (Perm.) 
 
 Harrisburg 
 
 Rhode Island 
 
 R. I. 
 
 Providence 
 
 South Carolina S. C. 
 
 Columbia 
 
 South Dakota 
 
 S. Dak. (S. D.) 
 
 Pierre 
 
 Tennessee 
 
 Term. 
 
 Nashville 
 
 Texas 
 
 Tex, 
 
 Austin 
 
 Utah 
 
 Utah 
 
 Salt Lake City 
 
 Vermont 
 
 Vt 
 
 Montpelier 
 
 Virginia 
 
 Va. 
 
 Richmond 
 
 Washington 
 
 Wash. 
 
 Olympia 
 
 West Virginia 
 
 W. Va. 
 
 Charleston 
 
 Wisconsin 
 
 Wis. 
 
 Madison 
 
 Wyoming 
 
 Wyo. 
 
 Cheyenne 
 
 
 Cuba, Havana. 
 
 
 
 Philippine Islands (P. I.), Manila. 

 
 SPELLING. 
 
 " If you and I and ewe and eye 
 
 And yew and aye (dear me!) 
 Were all to be spelled u and i, 
 How mixed up we should be. " 
 
 Until "simplified spelling" comes to the relief of the 
 speller, the following rules will be found, sometimes, a 
 helpful substitute. 
 Final e. 
 
 1. Final e is dropped before a suffix that begins 
 with a vowel; as, sale, salable; love, lovable; use, 
 usage. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 1. Final e is retained when it immediately follows o, to 
 prevent change of pronunciation of the root; as, shoe, shoeing; 
 hoe, hoeing. 
 
 2. Final e is retained in dyeing, singeing, tingeing (from 
 dye, singe, tinge), to distinguish them from dying, singing, 
 tinging. 
 
 3. Words ending in ce or ge generally retain the e before a 
 suffix beginning with a, i, or o, in order to preserve the proper 
 meaning and pronunciation; as, change, changeable; trace, 
 traceable; manage, manageable. 
 
 2. Final e is retained before a suffix beginning with 
 A consonant; as, pale, paleness; excite, excitement; 
 chastise, chastisement. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 I. When final e is immediately preceded by another vowel 
 127
 
 128 Spelling 
 
 (except e) it is sometimes dropped before a suffix beginning 
 with a consonant; as, due, duly; argue, argument; true, truly; 
 woe, woful.. 
 
 2. Words ending in dge are also generally excepted from 
 this rule; as, abridge, abridgment; acknowledge, acknowledg- 
 ment; judge, judgment; lodge, lodgment. 
 
 3. There are a few other irregular exceptions such as wise, 
 wisdom; whole, wholly; nurse, nursling. 
 
 Final ee. 
 
 3. Words ending in ee drop the final e before a 
 termination beginning with e; as, free, freer, freest; 
 oversee, overseer. 
 
 The double e is retained before terminations begin- 
 ning with other vowels ; as, agree, agreeable, agreeing ; 
 see, seeing; free, freeing. 
 
 4. Words ending in ie drop the e and change i to y 
 before the suffix ing, in order to prevent two i's from 
 coming together; as, die, dying; lie, lying. 
 
 Final f and I. 
 
 5. In monosyllables, final / and /, standing imme- 
 diately after a single vowel, are generally doubled ; as, 
 muff, staff, null, pull. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 The important exceptions are: Clef, if, of, pal; nil, soL 
 
 Final s. 
 
 6. The letter s, standing immediately after a 
 single vowel, is doubled except when it forms the 
 possessive case, the plural of nouns and the third 
 person singular of verbs; as, moss, press, hiss. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 The important exceptions are the following words: As, has, 
 is, his, gas, plus, us, this, thus, was, and yes.
 
 Spelling* 129 
 
 7. The only other consonants that are doubled at 
 the end of a word are b, d, g, m, n, p, r, t, and z. The 
 following list contains all, or nearly all, the words in 
 which these letters are doubled: Add, ebb, egg, err, 
 inn, odd, burr, butt, fizz, fuzz, purr, shirr. 
 
 Final y. 
 
 Usage is variable regarding this letter, and a good 
 memory and the dictionary are more to be relied upon 
 than rules. The following rule, however, is more or 
 less dependable: 
 
 8. Final y, when preceded by a consonant, is 
 changed to i before a suffix, except a suffix beginning 
 with i; as, icy, iciest, icily ; pity, pitiful ; earthy, earthi- 
 ness. 
 
 Before the suffix ing, final y is retained: try, trying; 
 dry, drying; pity, pitying. 
 
 Some derivatives of adjectives ending in y retain 
 the y before a suffix beginning with a consonant; as, 
 shy, shyly, shyness ; other words of the same class are 
 spelled with either y or i; as, dry, drily, dryly, driest; 
 sly, slyly, sliest, slyest. 
 
 9. Final y, preceded by a vowel, is generally 
 retained before a suffix ; as, pay, payable ; obey, obey- 
 ing; enjoy, enjoyed, enjoying. 
 
 Exceptions: 
 
 Day, daily; gay, gaily, gaiety (also gayly, gayety). 
 
 10. Nouns ending in y, preceded by a vowel, add ^ 
 to form the plural; as, money, moneys; attorney,, 
 attorneys; turkey, turkeys. 
 
 Exception: Words ending in uy; as, colloquy, colloquies.
 
 130 Spelling 
 
 11. Nouns ending in y, preceded by a consonant, 
 change y to i and add es to form the plural ; as, county, 
 counties; candy, candies. 
 
 12. Y is not changed before the terminations ship 
 and like; surety, suretyship; secretary, secretaryship; 
 lady, ladylike. 
 
 Final c. 
 
 13. Monosyllables ending with the sound of k, in 
 which c follows a vowel, generally have k added after 
 the c; black, track. 
 
 Exceptions: Arc, disc, lac, talc, zinc. 
 
 14. When words ending with c take a suffix begin- 
 ning with e, i, or y, the letter k is inserted before the 
 suffix, in order that c may not be sounded like s; as, 
 colic, colicky; traffic, trafficking, trafficked; zinc, 
 zinclcy. 
 
 Final g. 
 
 15. Final g is doubled, before a suffix beginning 
 with a vowel, to prevent its being sounded like j; as, 
 drag, dragging; humbug, humbugged, humbugging. 
 
 Other final consonants. 
 
 16. A final consonant immediately following a 
 diphthong or a double vowel is rarely doubled; as, 
 haul, reel, peat, door. 
 
 Exceptions: Feoff, enfeoff, guess. 
 
 17. In monosyllables and words accented on the 
 last syllable, final consonants (except h and x), pre-
 
 Spelling- 131 
 
 ceded by a single vowel, are doubled before a suffix 
 beginning with a vowel; as, sit, sitting; clan, clannish; 
 refer, referred; compel, compelled; acquit, acquittance. 
 
 NOTE. But if the accent is changed by the addition of the 
 suffix, the final consonant is not doubled; as, refer, reference; 
 prefer, preference. 
 
 Exception: Metal, metallic. 
 
 1 8. When preceded by a double vowel or a diph- 
 thong, the final consonant is not doubled before a 
 suffix ; as, soar, soaring ; seer, seeress. 
 
 19. The final consonant is not doubled before a 
 suffix beginning with a vowel when the accent falls on 
 any other syllable than the last; as, revel, reveled; 
 travel, traveled, traveling, traveler; profit, profited; 
 benefit, benefited; counsel, counselor; worship, wor- 
 shiped. 
 
 20. Derivatives formed by prefixing one or more 
 syllables to words that end in a double consonant, 
 commonly retain both consonants ; as, befall, inthrall, 
 foretell, enroll, emboss. 
 
 Exception: Until. 
 
 21. One I is dropped from the syllable full when it 
 forms a suffix; as, peaceful, beautiful, rueful, cupful. 
 
 22. One / is dropped when the termination ly is 
 added to words ending in //, to prevent three Vs 
 coming together; as, ill, illy; dull, dully; full, fully. 
 
 NOTE. The modern tendency is to omit one I from the root 
 word on the addition of terminations; as, skill, skilful, dull, 
 dulness; will, wilful.
 
 132 Spelling 
 
 23. Words ending with a vowel sound generally 
 retain it unchanged before a suffix beginning with a 
 vowel; as, echo, echoed; woo, wooer; huzza., huzzaed, 
 dough, doughy; subpoena, subpoenaed. 
 
 24. Some words ending in o, preceded by a con- 
 sonant, form the plural by the addition of es. The 
 words of this class in most common use are: cargo, 
 cargoes; echo, echoes; motto, mottoes; potato, pota- 
 toes; tomato, tomatoes. 
 
 The spelling of plural words is fully treated in the 
 chapter on "Plurals." 
 
 Able ible. 
 
 These syllables are a source of much perplexity, and 
 the typist without a knowledge of Latin has no remedy 
 but to memorize those words which take the termina- 
 tion able and those which must have ible: Words of 
 this class which are derived from the Latin end 
 respectively in able or ible according as they are 
 derived from words ending in abilis or in ibilis; as, 
 mutable (Latin, mutabilis) ; credible (Lat. credibilis). 
 Such of this class of adjectives as are derived from 
 English words generally end in able; as, avoid, 
 avoidable; eat, eatable; sale, salable. 
 
 En in. 
 
 There is a class of words beginning with en or in, 
 as enclose or inclose, enquire or inquire, ensure or 
 insure, many of which take either form of the prefix 
 indifferently. Webster's Dictionary gives preference 
 to the syllable in in all these words. Standard prefers 
 enclose, and inquire, insure, etc.
 
 Spelling 133 
 
 The words defense, expense, offense, pretense, etc., 
 are properly spelled with an s instead of a c, for the s 
 belongs to the words from which they are derived, and 
 is used also in all the derivatives. 
 
 Ei ie. 
 
 These combinations give endless trouble. It will 
 help a little to remember that c is followed by ei and 
 other consonants by ie, with very few exceptions, the 
 important ones in common use being seize, leisure. 
 Weigh and neighbor are easily remembered by their 
 pronunciation. 
 
 Ise ize. 
 
 As to the terminations ise and ize, usage varies. 
 The safest way is to memorize those words in which 
 each termination occurs. The words which in Eng- 
 land terminate in ise usually in the United States 
 terminate in ize. 
 
 Ise. Ize. 
 
 Advertise Civilize 
 
 apprise criticize (or we) 
 
 catechise naturalize 
 
 comprise patronize 
 
 compromise characterize 
 
 demise anathematize 
 
 disfranchise dramatize 
 
 emprise tantalize 
 
 premise memorize 
 
 merchandise sensitize 
 
 revise jeopardize 
 supervise 
 surmise
 
 134 Spelling 
 
 Ant ent. 
 
 The same rule applies to words terminating in ant or 
 ent. The following are in most common use: 
 
 Ant. Ent. 
 
 Confidant Antecedent 
 
 attendant decedent 
 
 defendant dependent 
 
 repentant precedent 
 
 affiant superintendent 
 
 abundant correspondent 
 observant 
 assistant
 
 POETRY. 
 
 Verse may be put into artistic form from manuscript 
 by indenting the short lines, which are usually the 
 alternate rhyming lines. Center the longest line in 
 the middle of the page. 
 
 (Rhyming short lines indented.) 
 
 Resistance will meet your endeavor, 
 
 When striving to dare and to do, 
 But be like the meteor's on-rush 
 
 Take fire, and burn your way through! 
 
 (Indent broken lines and very short lines.) 
 
 Lead, kindly Light! amid the encircling gloom 
 
 Lead thou me on; 
 The night is dark, and I am far from home; 
 
 Lead thou me on. 
 
 Keep thou my feet; I do not ask to see 
 The distant scene; one step enough for me. 
 
 (Last two lines of equal length and not indented.) 
 
 No lines need be indented when all of them contain 
 the same number of feet, each couplet rhyming. 
 
 Haste thee, nymph, and bring with thee 
 Jest, and youthful jollity, 
 Quips and cranks and wanton wiles, 
 Nods and becks and wreathed smiles. 
 
 135
 
 136 Poetry 
 
 (Two rhyming couplets indented.) 
 
 If I had time to find a place, 
 And sit me down full face to face 
 
 With my better self, that cannot show 
 
 In my daily life that rushes so, 
 It might be then I should see my soul 
 Was stumbling still towards the shining goal, 
 
 I might be nerved by the thought sublime, 
 If I had time! 
 
 When a line is broken the part carried over to the 
 next line is not commenced with a capital.
 
 COURT DOCUMENTS. 
 
 The preparation of law papers is governed by the 
 rules of the courts of the different States. Such rules 
 prescribe the size and weight of paper and the style 
 (whether with or without marginal lines), the color of 
 ink, etc. 
 
 As to style, the simplest arrangement of the writing 
 is considered the best, with little or no decoration. 
 
 Complaints, Answers, Notices, Stipulations, Orders, 
 etc., are as a rule written upon paper thirteen by eight 
 or eight and one-half inches, plain or with red marginal 
 lines, as may be required by the rules of court. 
 
 Three copies of every court document are required 
 where there are one plaintiff and one defendant. An 
 additional copy is made for each additional party. 
 
 The courts of some States require all court docu- 
 ments to be folioed, the figures, representing each 
 hundred words, being placed in the left-hand margin, 
 outside of the red lines. 
 
 Set the marginal stop at the left two spaces inside 
 of the red lines and in such manner at the right that no 
 letters run beyond the red lines. 
 
 The Caption of a court paper is the title, or intro- 
 ductory part, containing the name of the court and 
 of plaintiff and defendant, the latter connected by the 
 word "against" or "versus" (abbreviated "vs."). 
 
 Make a "box" running to 45 or 50 of the scale, as 
 may be required by the length of the lines of the title. 
 
 137
 
 138 Court Documents 
 
 Place the name of the Court in capitals above this box, 
 a double space between. 
 
 Inside of the box write the title of the case, the 
 names of plaintiff and defendant in capitals. 
 
 Do not write the name of the document at the right 
 of the box unless instructed to do so. 
 
 Begin all court papers at least two inches from the 
 top of the page. 
 
 The Venue is the place of trial ; also, the clause at the 
 beginning of an affidavit showing where it is made and 
 sworn to is called the Venue; as, "State of New York, 
 County of New York, ss. " 
 
 "SS" at the right of the Venue is an abbreviation 
 of scilicet, a contraction of scire licet, meaning, literally, 
 it is permitted to know. It calls attention to what 
 immediately follows. 
 
 The Jurat is the certificate of the notary or other 
 officer who "swears" the affiant, and is placed at the 
 end of an affidavit, verification or other paper. No 
 jurat follows an acknowledgment. 
 
 Names of courts should commence with a capital. 
 
 Numbers, sums of money, rates, dimensions, etc., 
 should be spelled and repeated in figures in parenthesis. 
 
 The common forms of verification and acknowledg- 
 ment, the attestation clause to a will and similar 
 paragraphs in frequent use, the wording of which 
 varies but slightly, should be memorized. 
 
 Write all court documents with a black ribbon. 
 
 Signature lines must be put on the last page of the 
 document with the concluding paragraph, never on a 
 separate page. If impossible to put all of the verifica- 
 tion on page with signature, it should at least be 
 started on that page. 
 
 Put a colored "back" on each copy of every court
 
 Court Documents 139 
 
 paper, endorsed with the Caption, the name of the 
 document, and the name and address of the attorney 
 who prepared the document, in form similar to the 
 following : 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 THOMAS A. GREENE et al, 
 
 Plaintiffs, 
 against 
 
 WILLIAM BROWN COMPANY, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 SUMMONS AND COMPLAINT. 
 
 DANIEL L. BENTON, 
 
 Attorney for Plaintiffs, 
 27 Broad Street, 
 New York City. 
 
 The following forms of arrangement of court papers 
 are in common use, the "box" on page 140 being the 
 standard form.
 
 140 Court Documents 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 x 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 Defendant. 
 
 SUMMONS . 
 
 Trial desired in 
 New York County. 
 
 TO THE ABOVE-NAMED DEPENDANT: 
 
 YOU ARE HEREBY SUMMONED to answer the 
 complaint in this action, and to serve a 
 copy of your answer on the plaintiff's 
 attorney within twenty days after the 
 service of this summons, exclusive of 
 the day of service; and in case of your 
 failure to appear or answer, judgment 
 will "be taken against you "by default for 
 the relief demanded in the complaint. 
 Dated March 27, 1811. 
 
 EMERSON BROWN, 
 Attorney for Plaintiff, 
 Office and Post-Off ice Address: 
 25 Pine Street, 
 Borough of Manhattan, 
 New York City. 
 
 (Bind Summons and Complaint together, Summons upper- 
 most.)
 
 Court Documents 141 
 
 (Complaint.) 
 
 (Caption.) 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 COMPLAINT. 
 
 (Introduction!) 
 
 The above-named plaintiff, complaining of the 
 above-named defendant, alleges: 
 
 (Allegations!) 
 
 I. That between January 4, 1904, and August i, 
 1904, plaintiff, at the special instance and request 
 of the defendant, performed work and rendered 
 services to defendant in connection with the forma- 
 tion of a syndicate by means of which the defendant 
 was enabled to dispose of a large amount of stock of 
 the Southern Central Railroad Company and upon 
 which defendant realized, through plaintiff's efforts, 
 a very large profit. 
 
 II. That defendant promised and agreed to pay 
 the plaintiff for his said services a fair and reasonable 
 compensation. 
 
 III. That the fair and reasonable value of plain- 
 tiff's said services is the sum of Ten thousand dollars, 
 which became due and payable by defendant on or 
 about the first day of August, 1904.
 
 142 Court Documents 
 
 IV. That plaintiff has demanded of defendant 
 payment of the sum aforesaid but defendant has 
 refused to pay the same or any part thereof. 
 
 (Prayer.) 
 
 WHEREFORE, plaintiff demands judgment against 
 defendant in the sum of Ten thousand dollars, with 
 interest thereon from August I, 1904, together with 
 the costs of this action. 
 
 (Venue.) Attorney for Plaintiff, 
 
 State of New York ) ss . 25 Pine Street, 
 
 County of New York J New York, N. Y. 
 
 (Verification.) 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, being duly sworn, deposes 
 and says: That he is the plaintiff above named; 
 that he has read the foregoing complaint and knows 
 the contents thereof; that the same is true to his own 
 knowledge, except as to the matters therein stated 
 to be alleged on information and belief, and that as 
 to those matters he believes it to be true. 
 
 (Jurat.) 
 
 Sworn to before me this 
 27th day of March, 1905. 
 
 Notary Public No. 
 
 New York County, N. Y. 
 
 For Answers, Demurrers, Petitions, Replications, 
 Stipulations, Notices, Affidavits (with the addition of 
 the venue following the caption), etc., the general 
 form of the Complaint is followed. 
 
 An affidavit begins with a Venue following the 
 Caption and ends with a Jurat.
 
 Court Documents 143 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 ANSWER. 
 
 The defendant above named, by Franklin Simmons, 
 his attorney, answering the complaint of the plaintiff 
 herein, 
 
 1. Denies each and every allegation contained in 
 paragraph I of said complaint. 
 
 2. Denies the allegation set forth in paragraph II 
 of: said complaint. 
 
 3. Denies that he has any knowledge or informa- 
 tion sufficient to form a belief as to the allegations 
 contained in paragraph III of said complaint. 
 
 4. Admits the allegation contained in paragraph 
 IV of said complaint. 
 
 WHEREFORE, the defendant demands that the 
 complaint herein be dismissed, with costs and dis- 
 bursements of this action. 
 
 Attorney for Defendant, 
 Office and Post-Office Address: 
 No. 27 William Street, 
 Borough of Manhattan, 
 New York City. 
 
 A Complaint or an Answer without a verification is 
 in some States void.
 
 144 Court Documents 
 
 (Notice) 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant, 
 
 SIR: 
 
 PLEASE TAKE NOTICE, that the issues of fact 
 in this action will be brought to trial and a motion 
 made to dismiss the complaint at a trial term of this 
 court appointed to be held in and for the County of 
 New York at the County Court House in the Borough 
 of Manhattan, City of New York, on the first Monday 
 of June, 1911, at 10:30 o'clock in the forenoon of that 
 day. 
 
 Dated the I5th day of May, 1911. 
 Yours, etc., 
 
 EARNER & GALLAND, 
 
 Attorneys for Defendant, 
 Office and Post-Office Address : 
 27 William Street, 
 Borough of Manhattan, 
 City of New York. 
 To 
 
 EMERSON BROWN, Esq., 
 Attorney for Plaintiff, 
 25 Pine Street, 
 New York City.
 
 Court Documents 145 
 
 (Judgment) 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 JUDGMENT. 
 
 The issues in the above-entitled action having come 
 on for trial before Honorable Francis M. Belden and a 
 jury at a Trial Term of this court, and the jury having 
 returned a verdict in favor of the plaintiff and against 
 the defendant for the sum of ten thousand dollars 
 ($10,000) and the costs of the plaintiff having been 
 taxed at three hundred dollars ($300), 
 
 Now, on motion of Emerson Brown, attorney for 
 plaintiff, 
 
 IT is ADJUDGED, that the plaintiff, James L. 
 Watkins, do recover of the defendant, Andrew W. 
 Scranton, the sum of ten thousand dollars ($10,000), 
 together with three hundred dollars ($300) costs as 
 taxed, making in all the sum of ten thousand three 
 hundred dollars ($10,300), and that said plaintiff have 
 execution therefor. 
 
 Dated, July 17, 1908. 
 
 (Signature of Judge) 
 J. S. C.
 
 146 Court Documents 
 
 NEW YORK SUPREME COURT 
 NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff. 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 ORDER. 
 
 Upon reading and filing the annexed petition of 
 James L. Watkins, the plaintiff herein, verified the 5th 
 day of June, 1906, with the annexed copies of the 
 pleadings and the annexed affidavit of Oliver Hobbs, 
 verified the same day, 
 
 Now, on motion of Oliver Hobbs, of counsel for the 
 plaintiff, 
 
 IT is ORDERED that the defendant herein be and 
 he is hereby directed to produce and discover and to 
 allow the plaintiff an inspection and copy, or permis- 
 sion to take a copy, of such contracts, accounts, papers 
 and other documents possessed by or under the control 
 of the defendant as will show all transactions involved 
 in this action between May 1st, 1904, and May ist, 
 
 1905- 
 
 AND IT is FURTHER ORDERED that all proceed- 
 ings on the part of the defendant be and hereby 
 are stayed until the hearing and determination of this 
 application. 
 Dated, New York, July 2, 1906. 
 
 (Signature) 
 Justice of the Supreme Court.
 
 Court Documents 147 
 
 (Trial Term and Special Term Orders begin with a 
 "hanging indention" as follows:) 
 
 At a Trial Term of the Supreme Court, 
 held in and for the County of New 
 York, at the County Court House 
 
 in said County, on the day of 
 
 , 1908. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Hon. , 
 
 Justice. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 ORDER. 
 
 The issues in this action having come regularly on 
 for trial, etc. 
 
 (The arrangement and display may be the same as 
 in the preceding order.)
 
 148 Court Documents 
 
 (Affidavit) 
 SURROGATE'S COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 IN THE MATTER 
 
 of the 
 
 Application of AMOS TRUE 
 for Letters of Guardianship of 
 the person and property of 
 Edward Leffingwell True, a 
 minor. 
 
 State of New York | 
 
 r ss * 
 County of New York ) 
 
 JOHN CLAYTON, being duly sworn, says that he 
 is a stenographer and typewriter; that on the nth day 
 of March, 1906, he made the annexed copies of the 
 affidavits of Ernest Keating and Joseph Black, filed 
 in the office of the Clerk of the County of New York 
 on the loth day of March, 1906, and referred to in the 
 affidavit of Amos True hereto annexed; that he has 
 carefully compared the annexed copies of said affida- 
 vits with the originals thereof, and that said copies are 
 true and correct copies of said originals. 
 
 Sworn to before me this 
 day of March, 1906. 
 
 Notary Public No. 
 
 New York County, N. Y.
 
 Court Documents 149 
 
 VERIFICATION (By Party). 
 State of New York ) 
 
 V gg 
 
 County of New York ) 
 
 JOHN JONES, being duly sworn, deposes and says: 
 That he is the plaintiff herein; that he has read and 
 knows the contents of the foregoing complaint, and 
 that the same is true to his own knowledge, except as 
 to the matters therein stated to be alleged upon 
 information and belief, and as to those matters he 
 believes it to be true. 
 
 Sworn to before me this 
 day of March, 1911. 
 
 Notary Public No. 
 
 New York County, N. Y. 
 
 VERIFICATION (By One of Several Parties). 
 State of New York 
 
 County of New York ) 
 
 ss.: 
 
 JOHN JONES, being duly sworn, says that he is 
 one of the plaintiffs herein ; that he has read the fore- 
 going complaint and knows the contents thereof; that 
 the same is true of his own knowledge, except as to the 
 matters therein stated to be alleged on information and 
 belief, and as to those matters he believes it to be true. 
 
 (Jurat same as preceding.)
 
 150 Court Documents 
 
 VERIFICATION (By Officer of Domestic 
 Corporation). 
 
 State of New York 
 County of New York 
 
 [ss.; 
 
 JOHN JONES, being duly sworn, says that he is 
 President of the Flushing Terminal Company, the 
 plaintiff above named, a domestic corporation; that 
 he has read and knows the contents of the foregoing 
 complaint, and that the same is true to his own 
 knowledge, except as to the matters therein stated to 
 be alleged on information and belief, and as to those 
 matters he believes it to be true. 
 
 Qurat as preceding.) 
 
 VERIFICATION (By Officer of Foreign 
 Corporation). 
 
 State of New York I 
 
 (ss * 
 
 JOHN JONES, being duly sworn, deposes and says: 
 that he is the Secretary of the Canton Fire Brick 
 Company, the defendant in the above-entitled action ; 
 that he has read and knows the contents of the fore- 
 going answer; that the same is true to his own know- 
 ledge, except as to the matters therein stated to be 
 alleged on information and belief, and as to those 
 matters he believes it to be true. Deponent further 
 says that the reason why this verification is not made 
 by the party and is made by him is that the defendant 
 is a foreign corporation; and the sources of deponent's
 
 Coxirt Documents 151 
 
 information and the grounds of his belief as to all 
 matters not therein stated upon his knowledge are as 
 follows: (Here follows an appropriate statement of 
 the facts.) 
 
 Sworn to before me this 
 day of June, 1911. 
 
 Notary Public No. 
 
 New York County, N. Y. 
 
 VERIFICATION (By Attorney). 
 
 State of New York ) 
 
 f ss * 
 County of New York ) 
 
 JOHN JONES, being duly sworn, says that he is one 
 of the attorneys for the Canton Fire Brick Company, 
 the plaintiff in the above-entitled action; that he 
 has read and knows the contents of the foregoing 
 complaint, and that the same is true to his own knowl- 
 edge, except as to the matters therein stated to be 
 alleged on information and belief, and as to those 
 matters he believes it to be true; and the reason that 
 this verification is not made by the party and is made 
 by deponent is that the party is a foreign corporation. 
 Deponent further says that the sources of his informa- 
 tion and the grounds of his belief as to all matters 
 therein not stated upon his knowledge are as follows: 
 (Statement of the facts.) 
 
 (Jurat same as preceding.)
 
 152 
 
 Court Documents 
 
 (Note of Issue.) 
 
 SUPREME COURT, NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 JOHN DOE, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 RICHARD ROE, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 ISSUE OF LAW TO BE TRIED 
 
 BY COURT WITHOUT JURY. 
 
 CHARLES J. JONES, Plaintiff's Attorney. 
 WILLIAM P. SMITH, Defendant's Attorney. 
 Issue joined on June 4, 1911. 
 Notice filed by plaintiff. 
 
 Nature and object of action, action to reform 
 written instrument. 
 
 Noticed for trial for October Term, 1911.
 
 Court Documents 153 
 
 (Arrangement of Captions peculiar to different States.) 
 
 (Maine.) 
 STATE OF MAINE. 
 
 YORK, SS. 
 
 SUPREME JUDICIAL COURT. 
 
 In Equity. 
 
 JOHN DOE, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 RICHARD ROE, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 (Massachusetts.) 
 COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS. 
 
 PLYMOUTH, SS. 
 
 SUPERIOR COURT. 
 
 March, 1911. 
 
 JOHN DOE \ 
 
 VS. V PETITION. 
 
 RICHARD ROE )
 
 154 
 
 Court Documents 
 
 (Illinois.) 
 
 STATE OF ILLINOIS 
 
 COOK COUNTY 
 
 JOHN DOE, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 vs. 
 
 IN THE CIRCUIT COURT 
 SS. OF COOK COUNTY. 
 
 April Term, 1911. 
 
 RICHARD ROE, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 Gen. No. 24560 
 Term No. 240 
 
 In Chancery. 
 
 State of Illinois ) 
 
 f 
 County of Cook ) 
 
 JOHN DOE 
 
 vs. 
 RICHARD ROE 
 
 ss. 
 
 IN THE CIRCUIT COURT 
 OF COOK COUNTY.
 
 Court Documents 
 
 155 
 
 (Method of writing Caption for consolidated causes.) 
 
 COURT OF APPEALS 
 OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK. 
 
 CHARLES M. CAPEN, individually and 
 as Executor of the Last Will and 
 Testament of Frank S. Capen, 
 
 Plaintiff -Respondent, 
 against 
 GEORGE S. CRANSTON, 
 
 Defendant-Respondent. 
 Impleaded with JAMES TRUAX, as 
 Executor of the Will of Frances 
 Capen, 
 
 Defendant- Appellant. 
 
 CHARLES M. CAPEN, individually and 
 as Executor of the Last Will and 
 Testament of Frank S. Capen, 
 
 Plaintiff-Respondent, 
 against 
 GEORGE S. CRANSTON, 
 
 Defendant-Respondent, 
 Impleaded with JAMES TRUAX, as 
 Executor of the Will of Frances 
 Capen, 
 
 Defendant-Appellant. 
 
 FRANK CAPEN 
 WILL SUIT. 
 
 CRANSTON 
 TRUST SUIT 
 
 BRIEF ON BEHALF OF PLAINTIFF-RESPONDENT 
 
 UPON MOTION TO DISMISS THE APPEALS 
 
 IN THE ABOVE-ENTITLED ACTIONS.
 
 156 
 
 Court Documents 
 
 (Brief.) 
 
 NEW YORK SUPREME COURT 
 NEW YORK COUNTY. 
 
 WILLIAM E. DENISON.ES Execu- 
 tor of and Trustee under the 
 Last Will and Testament of 
 Henri de Granville, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 against 
 
 AUGUSTE DE GRANVILLE and 
 CHARLES FRANCOIS DE GRAN- 
 VILLE, 
 
 Defendants. 
 
 Before 
 Hon. B. L. Hill, 
 
 Referee. 
 
 BRIEF FOR DEFENDANTS. 
 
 STATEMENT OF FACTS. 
 
 Henri de Granville, a resident of the City, County 
 and State of New York, died on the 2Oth day of July, 
 1904 (Record, fols. 2-4). On August 10, 1904, his 
 will was admitted to probate by the Surrogate of the 
 County of New York (Record, fol. 5). 
 
 Said will, after directing the payment of all just 
 debts, contained the following provision:
 
 Court Documents 157 
 
 "In case of the death of my said son Charles 
 * * * said income from said one-half of my entire 
 estate hereinbefore bequeathed to my son Charles, 
 shall be divided equally between my said brothers 
 Alan and Auguste, share and share alike, or the 
 descendants of such as may have died, per stirpes 
 and not per capita. " 
 
 POINT I. 
 
 THE AMOUNTS THAT HAVE BEEN PAH) BY THE TRUS- 
 TEE ON ACCOUNT OF OBLIGATIONS OF HENRI DE GRAN- 
 VILLE SHOULD BE DEDUCTED FROM THE PRINCIPAL OF 
 SAID ESTATE AND NOT FROM THE INCOME. 
 
 Matter of Babcock, 115 N. Y. 280. 
 
 One Detmold left a will by which he devised all 
 of his property to his daughters for life, with remain- 
 der to their issue. It was claimed by the remainder- 
 men that the taxes assessed on the property before the 
 testator's death should be paid from the portion of the 
 estate going to the life tenants. The Court (at page 
 452) said: 
 
 "It is contended by the appellants that in- 
 asmuch as current taxes, as between life tenants 
 and remaindermen, are not properly chargeable 
 to the former, these taxes should not be included 
 in the inventory of the debts of the estate. (Read 
 v. Solar, 72 N. Y. 154.) * * * It was undoubtedly 
 the duty of the executors to pay them from the 
 personal property."
 
 158 Court Documents 
 
 So an obligation to pay a mortgage on land which 
 has descended to a devisee or an heir is cast upon the 
 devisee or heir who takes the land. 
 
 Matter of Han, 144 N. Y. 478. 
 
 Halsey v. Reed, 9 Mass. 545; 34 Atl. 6ll. 
 
 3 Redfield on Wills, 414, Sec. 26. 
 
 It is clear that the real estate which is given to the 
 wife for use during her life was not included in the 
 "estate and property" with which the executors were 
 directed, in the second paragraph, to carry on the 
 business. 
 
 Respectfully submitted, 
 
 ALLEN & BUTLER, 
 
 Attorneys for Defendants. 
 James Whittaker, 
 Walter Learned, 
 Of Counsel.
 
 (Flap.) 
 
 w 
 
 td 
 P 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 S 
 tt- 
 
 8 
 
 fog. 
 
 2C 
 
 33 
 
 K| W 
 
 8 S 
 * w 
 
 O n 
 
 o x 
 pt O 
 
 & ^ 
 4 ^ 
 
 Cu 
 O 
 
 3 
 B 
 
 159
 
 "BINDING" LEGAL DOCUMENTS. 
 
 Legal documents, when finished and ready for use 
 in court or elsewhere, are bound in a stiff backing- 
 sheet and folded twice. Before fastening the backing- 
 sheet to the document, fold it properly and write upon 
 it the name of the document, names of the parties, 
 date or whatever may be appropriate to designate its 
 character. Turn the lower edge of the "back" 
 upward to within an inch of the top and press the fold 
 flat. Fold again from the bottom as before, leaving 
 the inch portion at the top free to be turned over as a 
 flap when the back is fastened upon the document. 
 Open the last fold and place in the machine and write 
 the endorsement on the second division from the top 
 the section next to the portion with the flap. This 
 will bring the printing on the outside when the docu- 
 ment is folded. Turn and press down the flap and 
 place it over the top of the papers to be bound to- 
 gether. If McGill's "round-head" fasteners are used, 
 put them in from the back, so that the round heads 
 are on the outside when the document is folded. This 
 is for convenience in filing.
 
 Court Documents 161 
 
 INTERROGATORIES 
 to be annexed to a Commission. 
 
 NEW YORK SUPREME COURT. 
 
 JAMES L. WATKINS, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ANDREW W. SCRANTON, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 Interrogatories to be administered to Walter Kip, 
 a witness to be examined under the annexed commis- 
 sion on behalf of the plaintiff in the above-entitled 
 action. 
 
 FIRST INTERROGATORY: What is your name, age, 
 occupation and place of residence? 
 
 SECOND INTERROGATORY: Do you know plaintiff 
 in this action, and if so, how long have you known 
 him? 
 
 THIRD INTERROGATORY: Did you on or about 
 December 9, 1910, prepare a contract for execution 
 by both the plaintiff and the defendant in this 
 action?
 
 1 62 Court Documents 
 
 FOURTH INTERROGATORY: If you answer the third 
 interrogatory in the affirmative, please state as ac- 
 curately as you can the substance of such contract. 
 
 LASTLY: Do you know anything concerning the 
 matter in question that may tend to the benefit and 
 advantage of the plaintiff? If so, declare the same 
 fully, as if you had been particularly interrogated 
 concerning the same. 
 
 (Signature of Attorney.) 
 
 In some cases where there is an investigation to be 
 made and testimony to be taken, the court appoints a 
 Referee to investigate facts, hear evidence, take testi- 
 mony and report his decision to the court. At such 
 a hearing before a Referee witnesses are examined the 
 same as at a trial in a court-room. The testimony of 
 the witnesses is taken by a stenographer in the office 
 of the Referee or wherever the hearing is held. 
 
 On the first page of the testimony the full caption 
 should appear, followed by the appearances of counsel 
 for the parties, name and presence of the Referee, day 
 and hour of the hearing. 
 
 At the subsequent sessions the full caption need not 
 appear, if it be long, but merely the names of the 
 parties. 
 
 The following shows a common form of arrangement 
 of the proceedings and testimony on a hearing before 
 a Referee:
 
 Court Documents 
 
 (First day's session.) 
 
 163 
 
 SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK, 
 COUNTY OF NEW YORK. 
 
 ALDINE MANUFACTURING 
 COMPANY, 
 
 Plaintiff, 
 
 against 
 
 ARIZPE MANUFACTURING 
 COMPANY, 
 
 Defendant. 
 
 Before 
 
 ALLEN BROWN, ESQ., 
 Referee. 
 
 New York, April 20, 1911. 
 
 1:30 P.M. 
 
 The parties met this day at the office of the Referee, 
 No. 35 Wall Street, New York City. 
 APPEARANCES : 
 
 MESSRS. GRAY & GREENE, for the Plaintiff, 
 M. E. LYNN, ESQ., for the Defendant. 
 
 The Referee states that he has taken the oath 
 required by law. 
 
 Mr. Gray opens for the plaintiff and states : 
 
 The facts briefly stated are these: On May 24, 
 1905, one George Graham entered into a contract with 
 the plaintiff. The contract was for the 'sale of certain 
 patents by Graham to plaintiff. 
 
 REFEREE: Who signed the contract for the plaintiff? 
 
 MR. GRAY: A. B. Blackmap 
 
 REFEREE: Where was it signed?
 
 164 Court Documents 
 
 MR. GRAY: At Phoenix, Arizona. It was placed 
 in escrow with the First National Bank for delivery to 
 plaintiff upon payment of certain sums to the bank. 
 
 JAMES SHERMAN, sworn as a witness on behalf of 
 the plaintiff, testifies as follows: 
 DIRECT EXAMINATION. 
 
 By Mr. Gray: 
 
 Q. Are you familiar with the signature of Mr. A. 
 B. Blackman? 
 
 MR. LYNN : Objected to as irrelevant. 
 
 REFEREE: He is entitled to answer that yes or 
 no. Objection overruled. 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Will you please look at the signature on this 
 paper and state whether, in your opinion, it is the 
 signature of Mr. A. B. Blackman? A. Yes, that is 
 Mr. Blackman's signature. 
 
 MR. LYNN: I should like to defer the cross- 
 examination of this witness until to-morrow at n in 
 the forenoon. 
 
 Adjourned to to-morrow at 1 1 A.M. 
 
 (Second day's session.) 
 
 ALDINE MANUFACTURING 
 COMPANY 
 
 against 
 
 ARIZPE MANUFACTURING 
 COMPANY 
 
 New York, April 21, 1911. 
 
 II A.M. 
 
 Met pursuant to adjournment.
 
 Court Documents 165 
 
 PRESENT: 
 
 The Referee and respective counsel. 
 CROSS-EXAMINATION BY MR. LYNN: 
 
 Q. Mr. Sherman, allow me to ask whether you 
 ever met Mr. Blackman after this alleged contract 
 was signed? A. No, I did not. 
 
 Q. Have you seen this contract at any time since 
 May 24, 1905? A. No, sir. 
 
 The testimony may be continued in this manner 
 indefinitely. 
 
 If exhibits are offered in evidence, the stenographer 
 makes a list of them in the following manner, attaching 
 the list to the testimony. 
 
 EVIDENCE. 
 Counsel for plaintiff offers in evidence the following: 
 
 EXHIBIT A, Copy of contract dated May 24, 1905, 
 
 signed by George Graham and A. B. 
 
 Blackman. 
 Copy of escrow agreement dated May 
 
 24, 1905. 
 Copy of letter dated June 3, 1905, 
 
 signed by George Graham.
 
 OTHER LEGAL PAPERS. 
 
 There are various other legal documents not classi- 
 fied as court papers, comprising deeds, contracts, 
 agreements, powers of attorney, bills of sale, wills, etc. 
 
 The manner of displaying these documents varies. 
 The following forms are in general use. Uniformity 
 of style is necessary to the best appearance. 
 
 The title or introductory words should be dis- 
 tinguished by full capitals; as, THIS DEED, THIS 
 AGREEMENT, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE 
 PRESENTS. With the exception of the last clause, 
 these words may also be written with a space between 
 the letters, and underscored. 
 
 Numbers of paragraphs may be in capitals or in 
 small letters, spaced and underscored and followed by 
 a colon; as, FIRST: First. First. 
 
 Introductory words to different paragraphs should 
 be in full caps; as, WHEREAS, RESOLVED, FUR- 
 THER RESOLVED, IT IS FURTHER AGREED, 
 TO HAVE AND TO HOLD, IN WITNESS WHERE- 
 OF, etc. 
 
 The names of parties to a deed or other agreement 
 should be in full capitals at least the first time. 
 
 The first word after an introductory word or clause 
 in full capitals may or may not begin with a capital. 
 It should begin with a capital if the introductory word 
 or clause is followed by a colon. 
 
 166
 
 Legal Papers 167 
 
 The word WITNESSETH following the first para- 
 graph of a deed or agreement may be in the last line 
 of the first paragraph or may be the first word of the 
 following paragraph, or it may be placed in a line by 
 itself, either in the center of the line or beginning at 
 the paragraph point, and should be followed by a 
 colon. It may be in full caps or in small letters 
 underscored and with a space between letters. 
 
 The following are the best forms in use:
 
 l68 Legal Papers 
 
 (Power of Attorney.) 
 
 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, 
 
 That I, ABNER BARNUM, of the City of New 
 York, being about to depart from said city and state 
 and sojourn temporarily in Europe, have made, 
 nominated, constituted and appointed in my place 
 and stead, and by these presents do make, nominate, 
 constitute and appoint, and in my place and stead 
 put CHESTER DARROW, of the City of New York, 
 my true and lawful attorney, for me and in my name, 
 place and stead, and to my use during my said absence 
 from the said city, to ask, demand, sue for, levy, 
 require, recover, and receive, all and all manner of 
 goods, chattels, debts, duties, rents, sum and sums 
 of money and demands whatsoever due, or hereafter 
 to become due and owing, or belonging unto me, on 
 account of the business now carried on by me in the 
 said City of New York as real estate broker, and upon 
 the receipt thereof, or of any part or parts thereof, to 
 make, give and execute acquittances, receipts, releases 
 or other discharges for the same, in my own name, or 
 in the name of my said attorney, and all other instru- 
 ments in writing of whatever nature, as to my said at- 
 torney may seem meet for carrying on the said business, 
 and make, or cause to be made, any avowries or cogni- 
 zances, and for me, and in my name, to commence and 
 prosecute any suits, or actions, or other legal proceed-
 
 Legal Papers 169 
 
 ings, for any goods, chattels, debts, duties, demands, 
 matter, cause, or thing, whatsoever, due or belonging, 
 or to be due and belonging unto me, or to be demanded, 
 or that may be demanded by me in any court of law or 
 equity, or elsewhere ; and whatever my said attorney 
 shall do, or cause to be done, in, about, or concern- 
 ing the premises, and any part thereof, I hereby ratify 
 and confirm. 
 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set 
 my hand and seal, the 5th day of May, in the year one 
 thousand nine hundred and eleven. 
 
 (L. S.) 
 
 Signed, sealed and delivered 
 in the presence of
 
 170 Legal Papers 
 
 (Bond.) 
 
 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, 
 That I, JAMES BLANK of Brooklyn, New York, am 
 held and firmly bound unto JOHN SMITH of Brook- 
 lyn, New York, in the penal sum of Three thousand 
 dollars (#3,000), lawful money of the United States, 
 to be paid to said John Smith, his executors, adminis- 
 trators or assigns; for which payment well and truly 
 to be made I bind myself, my heirs, executors and 
 administrators, firmly by these presents. 
 
 SEALED with my seal and dated the 24th day of 
 January, in the year of our Lord one thousand nine 
 hundred and eleven. 
 
 THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that 
 should James Lynn Watkins well and truly pay to 
 John Smith on or before the first day of August, 1911, 
 the full amount of a judgment for Fifteen hundred 
 dollars (#1500), which judgment was recovered by 
 said John Smith against the said James Lynn Watkins 
 and filed and docketed in the office of the Clerk of 
 Kings County on the 4th day of January, 1911, then 
 the above obligation to be void, otherwise to remain 
 in full force and virtue. 
 
 -(L. S.) 
 
 State of New York, 
 County of Kings, 
 
 On this 24th day of January, 1911, before me per- 
 sonally came James Blank, to me known and known 
 to me to be the person described in and who executed 
 the foregoing instrument, and he acknowledged to me 
 that he executed the same. 
 
 :> |ss.; 
 
 Notary Public No. . 
 
 Kings County, N. Y.
 
 Legal Papers 171 
 
 (Proxy.) 
 
 AUGUSTA STEEL AND IRON COMPANY. 
 
 PROXY FOR SPECIAL MEETING 
 OF STOCKHOLDERS. 
 
 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that 
 the undersigned stockholder in AUGUSTA STEEL 
 AND IRON COMPANY, a corporation of the State 
 of Maine, hereby constitutes and appoints JAMES E. 
 MANTELL and ALBERT F. EATON and CLAR- 
 ENCE E. JONES, and any one or more of them, and 
 such person or persons as they may substitute and 
 appoint, the lawful agents and attorneys of the under- 
 signed, for and in the name and stead of the under- 
 signed to appear and vote as proxy at a special meeting 
 of the stockholders of Augusta Steel and Iron Com- 
 pany to be held at the principal office of the Company, 
 No. 281 Portland Street, Augusta, Maine, on May 26, 
 1911, or at any adjournment thereof, according to the 
 number of votes the undersigned would be entitled 
 to cast if then personally present, upon any and every 
 question that may arise at said meeting, as set forth 
 in the notice of the time, place and purpose of said 
 meeting, dated May 16, 1911, and in considering and
 
 172 Legal Papers 
 
 acting upon any and every other matter that may 
 lawfully come before said meeting and any adjourn- 
 ment thereof, notwithstanding the same is not referred 
 to in said notice, hereby ratifying and confirming all 
 that said attorney or attorneys, his or their substitute 
 or substitutes, may lawfully do by virtue hereof. 
 
 Dated May 16, 1911. 
 
 Signed, sealed and delivered 
 in the presence of
 
 Legal Papers 173 
 
 (Notice.) 
 AUGUSTA STEEL AND IRON COMPANY. 
 
 NOTICE OF SPECIAL MEETING 
 OF STOCKHOLDERS. 
 
 By order of the President a special meeting of the 
 stockholders of AUGUSTA STEEL AND IRON 
 COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Maine, will 
 be held at the principal office of the company, No. 281 
 Portland Street, Augusta, Maine, on May 26th, 1911, 
 at 10 o'clock in the forenoon, for the purpose of ratify- 
 ing, approving and confirming the distribution made 
 among the stockholders of this corporation of the 
 stock of the Augusta Steel Company, a corporation of 
 the State of Maine, and the acts of the directors and 
 officers of this corporation in connection therewith. 
 
 Dated May 16, 1911. 
 
 JAMES BROWN, 
 
 Secretary.
 
 174 Legal Papers 
 
 (Warranty Deed.) 
 
 THIS INDENTURE, made the ninth day of 
 August, in the year one thousand nine hundred and 
 eleven, between ENOS NYE, of the City, County 
 and State of New York, party of the first part, and 
 HENRY JONES, of the same place, party of the 
 second part, 
 
 WITNESSETH, that the said party of the first 
 part, in consideration of the sum of one hundred 
 dollars (#100), lawful money of the United States of 
 America, paid by the party of the second part, does 
 hereby grant and release unto the said party of the 
 second part, his heirs and assigns forever, all that 
 certain lot or parcel of land situate, lying and being 
 in the Borough of Manhattan, City of New York, and 
 bounded and described as follows: 
 
 BEGINNING at a point on the south side of 
 Eighty-sixth Street about twenty (20) feet west of 
 the southwest corner of Eighty-sixth Street and Sixth 
 Avenue; running thence south, parallel with Sixth 
 Avenue, seventy (70) feet ; thence west, parallel with 
 Eighty-sixth Street, thirty (30) feet; thence north, 
 parallel with Sixth Avenue, seventy (70) feet to the 
 south side of Eighty-sixth Street ; and thence along 
 Eighty-sixth Street thirty (30) feet to the point or 
 place of beginning. 
 TOGETHER with the appurtenances, and all the 
 
 estate, right, title and interest of the party of the first 
 
 part in and to said premises. 
 
 TO HAVE AND TO HOLD the above granted
 
 Legfal Papers 175 
 
 premises unto the said party of the second part, his 
 heirs and assigns forever. 
 
 And the said party of the first part does covenant 
 with the party of the second part as follows: 
 
 FIRST. That the party of the first part is seized 
 of the said premises in fee simple and has good right to 
 convey the same. 
 
 SECOND. That the said premises are free from 
 encumbrances. 
 
 THIRD. That the party of the first part will 
 forever warrant the title to said premises. 
 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said party of the 
 first part has hereunto set his hand and seal the day 
 and year first above written. 
 
 . (Seal) 
 
 In the presence of 
 
 State of New York ) 
 
 > gg^ 
 
 County of New York ) 
 
 On this ninth day of August in the year one thou- 
 sand nine hundred and eleven, before me personally 
 came Enos Nye, to me known and known to me to be 
 the individual described in, and who executed, the 
 foregoing instrument, and he duly acknowledged to 
 me that he executed the same. 
 
 Notary Public No. . 
 
 New York County, N. Y.
 
 WILLS. 
 
 When a Will begins in the old style with the phrase 
 "In the Name of God, Amen," this phrase may be 
 centered in a line at the top, or it may commence the 
 first line of the Will. 
 
 IN THE NAME OF GOD, AMEN. 
 
 I, HENRY HAMILTON, of the City, County and 
 State of New York, being of sound and disposing 
 mind and memory, etc. 
 
 Or, 
 
 In the Name of God, Amen. I, HENRY HAMIL- 
 TON, of the City, County and State of New York, 
 etc. 
 
 The following, however, is the usual form for Wills. 
 
 I, HENRY HAMILTON, of the City, County and State 
 of New York, being of sound and disposing mind and 
 memory, and wishing to make just disposition of all 
 my worldly effects, do hereby make, publish and 
 declare this to be my last Will and Testament, hereby 
 revoking all former or other wills or testamentary 
 writings, of whatsoever nature, heretofore made or 
 signed by me. 
 
 176
 
 Wills 177 
 
 FIRST. I direct that all my just debts and funeral 
 expenses be paid by my executor as soon after my 
 decease as possible. 
 
 SECOND. I give and bequeath to my brother, 
 WILLIAM HAMILTON, should he survive me, the sum 
 of ten thousand dollars ($10,000). In the event 
 that my said brother WILLIAM HAMILTON shall have 
 died before me, leaving lawful issue him surviv- 
 ing, then I give and bequeath a like sum of ten thou- 
 sand dollars ($10,000) to the surviving lawful issue of 
 my said brother, the same to be distributed among 
 such issue share and share alike, per stirpes and not 
 per capita. 
 
 THIRD. I give, devise and bequeath all the rest, 
 residue and remainder of my estate, real and personal, 
 of every kind whatsoever and wheresoever situated, to 
 my wife MARY HAMILTON, absolutely and in fee 
 simple. 
 
 FOURTH. I nominate and appoint my wife, MARY 
 HAMILTON, and my brother, WILLIAM HAMILTON, and 
 the survivor of them, executrix and executor of this 
 my will. 
 
 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed 
 my name and affixed my seal this eighteenth day of 
 January, one thousand nine hundred and eleven. 
 
 (L. S.J 
 
 Signed, sealed, published and de- 
 clared by Henry Hamilton, the tes- 
 tator, as and for his last Will and 
 Testament in the presence of us and 
 each of us, and we, at his request
 
 178 Wills 
 
 and in his presence and in the pres- 
 ence of each other, have hereunto sub- 
 scribed our names as witnesses this 
 eighteenth day of January, one thou- 
 sand nine hundred and eleven. 
 
 residing at 
 
 residing at 
 
 residing at 
 
 The Attestation Clause (the part beginning "signed, 
 sealed and delivered" and sometimes erroneously 
 called the Testimonium) may also be written clear 
 across the page and the lines for the names and 
 addresses of the witnesses put in the same position as 
 the line for the testator's signature. Some lawyers 
 prefer one form and some the other. But whichever 
 form is used, the Attestation Clause, with its signa- 
 tures, must be put on the same page with the will and 
 not on a separate page. 
 
 The last page of a will should not begin with the 
 Testimonium (the paragraph beginning "In witness 
 whereof"), but should contain at least one paragraph, 
 or a portion of a paragraph, of the will proper.
 
 Wills 179 
 
 (Another form for address of witnesses.) 
 
 The foregoing instrument consisting 
 of live pages, was subscribed, sealed, 
 published and declared by Henry 
 Hamilton as and for his last will 
 and testament in our presence and 
 in the presence of each of us, and 
 we at the same time at his request, 
 in his presence and in the presence 
 of each other, hereunto subscribe 
 our names and residences as attesting 
 witnesses this sixteenth day of Novem- 
 ber, one thousand nine hundred and 
 eleven. 
 
 Residing at- 
 
 Residing at- 
 
 Residing at- 
 
 (Endorsement for the "back" or cover.) 
 LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT 
 
 of 
 HENRY HAMILTON 
 
 Dated November 16, 1911.
 
 1 8o Wills 
 
 TO "TIE" OR "RIBBON" A WILL. 
 
 First put the "back," properly endorsed, in place 
 upon the will, make three round holes (proper instru- 
 ments or "punches" are made for the purpose) across 
 the top where the flap of the "back" is turned over, 
 one exactly in the center and one on each side about 
 an inch from each margin of the page ; thread a blunt 
 needle with the tape or ribbon, put it through the 
 center hole from front to back, leaving an end long 
 enough to reach the signature line on the last page; 
 then through one marginal hole from back to front, 
 then across through the other marginal hole from 
 front to back, then again through the center from 
 back to front, keeping the ribbon smooth and un- 
 twisted. Tie the two ends at the center hole in a 
 small knot, put the free end of the ribbon also through 
 the needle, work the needle through the center hole 
 and down in front of the last page of the will and cut 
 the ribbon about an inch and a half below the line for 
 the testator's signature. Here it is to be fastened by 
 the testator with a small seal when he signs his name. 
 Frequently, however, the stenographer is required to 
 fasten the ends with the seal just over the letters 
 "L. S." at the end of the signature line. The size of 
 the seal is a matter of taste. One about an inch in 
 diameter is a good size for a will, preferably a "gold" 
 color.
 
 FORMS. 
 
 (Title Page.) 
 
 ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION 
 
 and 
 BY-LAWS 
 
 of the 
 MANHATTAN TRANSIT COMPANY 
 
 Home Office, New Ross, N. J. 
 OFFICERS 
 
 PHILIP STANNARD, JOHN VAUGHN, 
 
 President Vice-President 
 
 C. L. CLEMENT, W. L. BRUNN, 
 Secretary Treasurer 
 
 DIRECTORS 
 
 WILLIAM M. MILLER 
 SIMON T. L. BLAIR 
 LEONARD D. PHILLIPS 
 CHARLES F. McGUIRE 
 181
 
 1 82 Forms 
 
 ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION 
 
 of the 
 MANHATTAN TRANSIT COMPANY. 
 
 We, the undersigned, for the purpose of forming a 
 corporation in pursuance of an Act of the Legislature 
 of the State of New Jersey, entitled "An Act Concern- 
 ing Corporations" (Revision of 1896) and the various 
 acts amendatory thereof and supplemental thereto, 
 do make, record and file this certificate: 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 The corporate name of the Company is MAN- 
 HATTAN TRANSIT COMPANY. 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 The objects for which the corporation is established 
 are as follows: To construct, or promote the con- 
 struction of, and to purchase or otherwise acquire 
 railways, whether operated by steam, electricity or 
 other power; to condemn lands for and to accept 
 grants of or otherwise acquire franchises for any and 
 all of such purposes; (etc.).
 
 Forms 183 
 
 BY-LAWS 
 
 of the 
 MANHATTAN TRANSIT COMPANY. 
 
 ARTICLE I. 
 
 STOCK AND STOCKHOLDERS. 
 
 Section i. The principal office of this corporation 
 in New Jersey shall be No. 15 Exchange Place, New 
 Ross, New Jersey. 
 
 Sec. 2. The annual meeting of the stockholders for 
 the election of a Board of Directors and the trans- 
 action of such other business as may properly come 
 before the meeting, shall be held on the 5th day of 
 January of each year. 
 
 ARTICLE II. 
 
 DIRECTORS. 
 
 Section i. The business and property of the cor- 
 poration shall be managed by its Board of Directors, 
 nine in number, who shall be stockholders. (Etc., 
 etc.)
 
 184 Forms 
 
 AMERICAN TIRE COMPANY. 
 
 ADJOURNED MEETING OF DIRECTORS. 
 November 22, 1906. 
 
 MINUTES of adjourned meeting of the Board of 
 Directors of AMERICAN TIRE COMPANY, duly 
 and regularly called and held on the 22nd day of 
 November, 1906, at 3 o'clock in the afternoon, at 85 
 Duane Street, Jersey City, New Jersey, pursuant to 
 the adjournment of November 2ist, 1906. 
 
 The following Directors were present in person: 
 
 Albert R. Brisbane, 
 George S. Thomas, 
 Morris F. Pollard, 
 Henry Bringolf, 
 constituting all the Directors of the Company. 
 
 The Chairman of the Board, Mr. Thomas, acted as 
 Chairman of the meeting. 
 
 The Secretary of the Board, Mr. Bringolf, acted as 
 Secretary of the meeting. 
 
 A letter from Spencer Garland, a copy of which is 
 set out in the resolution that follows, was presented to 
 the meeting by a representative of Mr. Garland, who 
 stated that Mr. Garland was about to retire from
 
 Forms 185 
 
 business and desired to dispose of his property and 
 business. 
 
 After a full discussion, the following preamble and 
 resolutions were, upon motion duly made and seconded, 
 unanimously adopted: 
 
 WHEREAS, Spencer Garland, of Columbus, 
 Ohio, has made the following offer to this Company : 
 "I hereby offer to sell to the American Tire 
 Company all the property and good-will of my 
 business in the City of Columbus, Ohio, con- 
 sisting of the mills at the foot of Green Street 
 in said city and the machinery therein located, 
 for the sum of $126,000"; 
 
 THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, That this 
 Company accept said offer of Spencer Garland to 
 sell to this Company the properties and business 
 mentioned in said offer on the terms therein set 
 forth. 
 
 FURTHER RESOLVED, That the President- 
 be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to 
 accept, in the name and on behalf of this Company, 
 said offer. 
 
 Upon motion the meeting thereupon adjourned, 
 to reconvene at the same place on the 23rd day of 
 November, 1906, at 2 o'clock P.M. 
 
 Secretary. 
 Approved: 
 
 Chairman.
 
 LAW TERMS, FOREIGN PHRASES. 
 NAMES OF LEGAL DOCU- 
 MENTS, ETC. 
 
 There are but few French phrases now used in 
 business. Those commonly current are given in this 
 list. 
 
 Accumulative sentence 
 or judgment 
 
 Ambulatory 
 
 Ancillary 
 Appellant 
 Appellee 
 
 Assignment of errors 
 Bane 
 
 Cestui que trust 
 
 A sentence to a term of imprisonment 
 to commence after a previous term 
 shall have expired. 
 
 Alterable; changeable; as a contract, 
 will or pleading the terms of which 
 may be changed. 
 
 Auxiliary; subordinate; as, ancillary 
 administration. 
 
 The party making an appeal from one 
 jurisdiction to another. 
 
 The party against whom an appeal has 
 been taken. 
 
 A statement by the plaintiff in error 
 setting forth the errors complained of. 
 
 Bench; a seat or bench of justice. 
 Court in bane a meeting of all the 
 judges, or such as form a quorum. 
 
 One for whose benefit another holds 
 lands or goods. 
 186
 
 Law Terms 187 
 
 Champerty A bargain with a litigant to bear 
 
 expenses of litigation in consideration 
 of a share of the property sued for. 
 
 Charge" d' Affaires (PI. The officer in charge of diplomatic 
 
 Charges d' Affaires) business in a foreign country in the 
 
 absence of a minister or ambassador. 
 
 Chose in action Personal property of which the owner 
 
 has not the possession but merely a 
 right of action for its possession. 
 
 Cite To summon; to refer to legal authority. 
 
 Code (Stock or stem; originally the board on 
 
 which the ancients wrote.) A body 
 of laws established by the legislative 
 authority of the state. 
 
 Color of title An apparent title founded upon a 
 
 written instrument. 
 
 Complainant One who enters a complaint before a 
 
 magistrate. 
 
 Compounding a felony The act of a person aggrieved who agrees 
 for pay not to prosecute a felon. 
 
 Confession and avoid- The admission in an answer of the truth 
 ance of statements made in a pleading. 
 
 Coparcenary The joint holding of lands by two or 
 
 more persons as heirs. 
 
 Co-respondent Any person called upon to answer a 
 
 petition (or other proceeding) jointly 
 with another. 
 
 Corporeal property Tangible, substantial property. 
 
 Count A plaintiff's statement of his cause of 
 
 action.
 
 1 88 
 
 Curator 
 
 Law Terms 
 
 A guardian; a legally appointed cus- 
 todian of property or persons. 
 
 Debenture A written instrument creating a charge 
 
 on a certain fund or property. 
 
 Decretal order An order of court determining some 
 
 right between the parties. 
 
 Dedimus (or dedimus ("We have given power.") A writ or 
 potestatem) commission authorizing the perform- 
 
 ance of certain acts. 
 
 Deed poll A deed made by one party only. 
 
 Defeasance An annulment ; a condition which defeats 
 
 the operation of a deed or other 
 instrument. 
 
 Demurrer A pleading denying the sufficiency of 
 
 the pleading demurred to. 
 
 Enfeoff 
 
 En route 
 Escrow 
 
 Esquire 
 
 To make a gift of corporeal heredita- 
 ments. 
 
 On the way. 
 
 A written instrument (deed, contract) 
 deposited by the grantor with a 
 third person to be delivered to the 
 grantee on the happening of a certain 
 event. 
 
 A title applied by courtesy to officers of 
 almost every description, to members 
 of the bar and others. 
 
 Feme covert 
 Feme sole 
 Feoffment 
 
 A married woman. 
 An unmarried woman. 
 
 A gift or grant of lands by deed with 
 delivery of possession.
 
 Law Terms 
 
 189 
 
 Fiduciary 
 
 Force majeure 
 Garnish 
 
 Garnishee 
 
 Holographic will 
 
 Hereditaments 
 
 Hotchpot (sometimes 
 hotchpotch, hodge- 
 podge) 
 
 Inchoate 
 In pais 
 Interlocutory 
 
 Pertaining to a relation of trust; a 
 trustee; guardian. 
 
 Beyond control. 
 
 To warn; to attach money or property 
 due or belonging to a defendant in 
 the hands of a third person. The past 
 tense of this word is properly gar- 
 nished; although the corrupt forms 
 garnisheed and garnisheeing are often 
 used. 
 
 A debtor who has been warned not to 
 pay or deliver money due or property 
 belonging to his creditor. 
 
 A will wholly in the testator's hand- 
 writing. 
 
 Things capable of being inherited. 
 
 The commixture of property belonging 
 to different persons in order to secure 
 an equitable division. 
 
 Imperfect; unfinished. 
 Without legal formality. 
 
 Intermediate or intervening; not deci- 
 sive of the entire matter in issue. 
 
 Intervener (often 
 spelled interoenor) 
 
 Issuable 
 Jeofail 
 
 One who interposes in a suit and becomes 
 a party thereto. 
 
 Leading to an issue. 
 
 "I have failed." An oversight; the ac- 
 knowledgment of an error in pleading.
 
 190 
 
 Jurat 
 
 Juridical 
 Jurisprudence 
 
 Litigious 
 
 Malfeasance 
 
 Mandamus 
 
 Maritime 
 Martial law 
 
 Matter in pais 
 
 Mesne 
 
 Metes and bounds 
 
 Misfeasance 
 
 Misjoinder 
 
 Mittimus 
 
 Moiety 
 
 Law Terms 
 
 That part of an affidavit where the 
 officer certifies that the same was 
 " sworn" before him. 
 
 Relating to the administration of 
 justice and judicial proceedings. 
 
 The science by which laws are reduced 
 to a system and their principles 
 applied. 
 
 Quarrelsome; inclined to litigation. 
 The doing of a wrongful or unlawful act. 
 
 A writ from a superior court to an 
 inferior court or to a person requiring 
 the performance of a certain act. 
 
 Pertaining to navigation or commercial 
 intercourse upon the seas. 
 
 Military rule and authority existing in 
 time of war or serious civil disturb- 
 ance. 
 
 Matter of fact as distinguished from 
 matter of law or of record. 
 
 Intermediate. 
 Measures and boundary -lines of land. 
 
 The doing of a lawful act in an unlawful 
 manner. 
 
 Improper joining of parties to a suit or 
 of different causes of action. 
 
 " We send." A warrant of commitment 
 to prison. 
 
 Half; sometimes, any portion or share.
 
 Law Terms 
 
 191 
 
 Nonfeasance 
 Novation 
 
 Nuncupative will 
 " On all fours" 
 
 Ouster 
 
 Over 
 
 Oyer and terminer 
 
 Oyez 
 
 Omission to perform a required duty. 
 
 The substitution of a new obligation for 
 an old one, which is thereby extin- 
 guished. 
 
 A will made orally before witnesses, 
 afterwards reduced to writing. 
 
 A phrase used by some lawyers to indi- 
 cate that a case at bar is in all points 
 similar to another case. 
 
 Ejection; dispossession. 
 A hearing; a trial. 
 
 "To hear and determine "; applied to 
 certain criminal courts. 
 
 ; 'Hear ye." An introductory word to 
 command attention at the opening of 
 court. 
 
 Parcenary, coparcenary 
 
 Parol (or parole) con- 
 tract 
 
 Personalty 
 Personality of laws 
 
 Petit jury 
 Praecipe (precipe) 
 Prothonotary 
 
 The joint holding of lands by two or 
 more persons as heirs. 
 
 An oral contract, or one not wholly in 
 writing. 
 
 Property which is movable. 
 
 That quality of laws which concerns 
 the condition, state and capacity of 
 persons. 
 
 "Little" jury, so called to distinguish it 
 from the grand jury 
 
 A written order for the issuance of a 
 
 writ. 
 
 Title of an officer of some courts.
 
 1 92 Latin Words and Phrases 
 
 Quash To annul, or overthrow. 
 
 Quasi As if ; to a certain degree. 
 
 Satisfaction piece 'A written acknowledgment of payment 
 
 or satisfaction of a, mortgage or judg- 
 ment. 
 
 Tort A wrongful act. 
 
 Tortfeasor A wrong-doer. 
 
 To wit Namely; that is to say. 
 
 Tripartite Consisting of three parts. 
 
 Trover An action at law to recover the value of 
 
 goods wrongfully converted, 
 
 Unilateral Binding on one party only. 
 
 Usufruct The right to use another's property. 
 
 LATIN WORDS AND PHRASES. 
 
 The Latin words and phrases in common use in 
 large law offices are given in this list. The ambitious 
 stenographer will memorize the spelling and meaning 
 of them all. 
 
 A dato 
 A fortiori 
 A posteriori 
 
 A priori 
 
 Ab initio (ab init.) 
 
 From the date. 
 With stronger reason. 
 
 From that which follows; from effect to 
 cause. 
 
 From what is before; from cause to 
 effect. 
 
 From the beginning.
 
 Latin Words and PHrases 193 
 
 Absente re (abs. re) Defendant long absent. 
 
 Addendum (pi. 
 
 addenda) Something to be added. 
 
 Ad finem (ad fin.) To (or at) the end. 
 
 Ad infinitum (ad inf.) To infinity. 
 
 Ad interim (ad int.) In the meantime. 
 
 Ad inquirendum 
 
 Ad libitum (ad lib.) 
 
 Ad litem 
 
 Ad quod damnum 
 
 Ad referendum 
 
 Ad rem 
 Ad valorem 
 Ad vitam 
 Alias 
 Alibi 
 
 Aliundi 
 Alma mater 
 
 For inquiry; a writ of inquiry. 
 
 At pleasure. 
 
 For the purpose of the suit. 
 
 At what damage. 
 
 To be further considered. 
 
 To the thing, point, purpose. 
 
 According to value. 
 
 For life. 
 
 Formerly; otherwise. 
 
 In another place. A form of defense 
 by which a person attempts to prove 
 that he was elsewhere than at the 
 place alleged. 
 
 From another source. 
 
 Fostering mother; applied to the institu- 
 tion of learning where one has been 
 educated. 
 
 Alumna (pi. alumnae) A woman who has been graduated from 
 an institution of learning. 
 
 Alumnus (pi. alumni) A man who has been graduated from an 
 
 institution of learning. 
 13
 
 194 Latin Words and PKrases 
 
 Amanuensis (pi. -ses) One who copies manuscripts for another; 
 one who writes from another's dicta- 
 tion. 
 
 Amicus curiae A friend of the court. 
 
 Amor patriae Love of one's country. 
 
 Animus The animating purpose; grudge, hostile 
 
 feeling. 
 
 Anno Domini (A.D.) The year of our Lord. 
 
 Anno mundi The year of the world. 
 
 Ante Before. 
 
 Ante bellum Before the war. 
 
 Ante meridiem (A.M.) Before noon. 
 
 Ante mortem Before death. 
 
 Argumentum ad absur- An argument directed to show the ab- 
 dum surdity of an opponent's case. 
 
 Assumpsit He assumed; in law, a promise to dc 
 
 some act, or pay something to another. 
 
 Bona fide In good faith 
 
 Bonus An extra consideration for something 
 
 received. 
 
 Capias A writ of attachment or arrest. 
 
 Caveat "Let him beware." A warning. 
 
 Caveat actor Let the doer beware. 
 
 Caveat emptor Let the buyer beware. 
 
 Caveat vendor Let the seller beware. 
 
 Centum A hundred.
 
 Latin \STords and PHrases 195 
 
 Certiorari To be certified. A writ commanding a 
 
 court to certify and return records to 
 a superior court. 
 
 Commune bonum A common good. 
 
 Compos mentis Of sound mind. 
 
 Contra Against. 
 
 Coram non judice Acts done by a court which has no 
 
 jurisdiction. 
 
 Coram vobis A writ of error. 
 
 Corpus Body; substance. 
 
 Corpus comitatus The inhabitants of a county. 
 
 Corpus delicti The body of the offense; the essence of 
 
 the crime. 
 
 Corpus juris civilis 
 Crimen falsi 
 Crux 
 
 Cui bono? 1 
 Cui malo? 
 Cum grano salis 
 
 The body of the civil law. 
 
 Forgery; perjury; false dealing. 
 
 A cross; difficult point to settle. 
 
 What good will it do? 
 
 Whom will it harm? 
 
 With a grain of salt. 
 Cum testamento annexo With the will annexed. 
 Custodia legis In the custody of the law. 
 
 Damnum absque Injury without wrong; loss without legal 
 
 injuria injury. 
 
 Data Facts; things given or granted. 
 
 De bene esse Conditionally or provisionally. 
 
 De bonis non Of the goods not yet administered upon.
 
 196 Latin W^ords and PKrases 
 
 Dedimus potestatem 
 
 De facto 
 De jure 
 Dele (delete) 
 
 A writ empowering a. private person to 
 act in the place of a judge. 
 
 In fact; in deed. 
 Lawfully; by legal title. 
 
 Blot out; a printer's term applied to 
 proof. 
 
 De lunatico inquirendo A writ directing an inquiry as to a 
 person's sanity. 
 
 De novo 
 
 Deovolente(D.V.) 
 De son tort 
 Deus ex machina 
 Devastavit 
 Devisavit vel non 
 
 Dictum 
 Dies non 
 Dramatis personae 
 
 Anew 
 
 God willing. 
 
 Of his own wrong. 
 
 A god out of a machine. 
 
 Waste; mismanagement. 
 
 An order from a court of chancery to a 
 court of law to try the validity of a 
 will. 
 
 A saying; maxim. 
 
 A day on which judges do not sit. 
 
 Characters represented in a drama. 
 
 One out of many. 
 Of the same kind. 
 To err is human. 
 An error. 
 
 E pluribus unum 
 
 Ejusdem generis 
 
 Errare est humanum 
 
 Erratum (pi. errata) 
 
 Et alios, or alii (et al.) And others. 
 
 Et alius (et al.) And another. 
 
 Et caetera (etc., &c.) And others; and other things.
 
 Latin "Words and PHrases 197 
 
 Et sequentia (et seq.) And following. 
 
 Et uxor (et ux.) 
 
 Ex 
 
 Ex animo 
 
 Ex cathedra 
 
 Ex contractu 
 
 Ex curia 
 
 Ex delicto 
 
 And wife. 
 
 Out of; from. 
 
 Heartily, sincerely. 
 
 From the chair (of authority). 
 
 From the contract. 
 
 Out of court. 
 
 From the crime. 
 
 Exempli gratia (ex gri.) For example. 
 
 Exeunt omnes 
 
 Exit 
 
 Ex officio 
 
 Ex parte 
 
 Ex post facto 
 
 Expressio verbis 
 
 Expressio unius est 
 exclusio alterius 
 
 Ex relatione (ex rel.) 
 
 Extempore 
 
 Ex vi termini 
 
 Facias 
 Falsi crimen 
 
 Felo de se 
 
 Fiat 
 
 Fieri facias (fi. fa.) 
 
 All go out. 
 He goes out. 
 ' By virtue of his office. 
 Of the one part. 
 By a subsequent act. 
 In express terms. 
 
 The express mention of one thing is the 
 exclusion of the other. 
 
 At the relation of. 
 Without premeditation. 
 By force of the term. 
 
 To make; to do. 
 
 A fraudulent subornation or conceal- 
 ment of truth. 
 
 A suicide. (A felon upon himself.) 
 A command. 
 Cause it to be done.
 
 198 Latin Words and PHrases 
 
 Finis 
 
 Flagrante delicto 
 
 Genius loci 
 
 Gratis 
 
 Gravamen 
 
 Habeas corpus 
 Habendum 
 
 Hie jacet 
 
 Ibidem (Ib. Ibid.) 
 
 Idem (Id.) 
 
 Id est (i.e.) 
 
 Imprimis 
 
 In esse 
 
 In extremis 
 
 Infra 
 
 In futuro 
 
 In loco parentis 
 
 In medias res 
 
 In pari delicto 
 
 In pari materia 
 
 In personam 
 
 In posse 
 
 End. 
 
 In the commission of crime. 
 
 The genius of the place. 
 
 Free; for nothing. 
 
 The grievance complained of. 
 
 A writ commanding that the body of the 
 prisoner be produced. 
 
 In deeds, the clause defining the extent 
 of the ownership of the grantee and 
 commencing, " To have and to hold. " 
 
 Here lies. 
 
 In the same place. 
 
 The same. 
 
 That is. 
 
 In the first place. 
 
 In being, or existence. 
 
 At the point of death. 
 
 Below; within. 
 
 In the future. 
 
 In the place of a parent. 
 
 In the midst of things. 
 
 In equal fault. 
 
 Upon the same matter or subject. 
 
 Against the person. 
 
 In possible being; not in actual existence.
 
 Latin Words and PHrases 199 
 
 In propria persona 
 
 In re 
 
 In rem 
 
 In statu quo 
 
 Inter alia 
 
 Inter alios 
 
 Interim 
 
 Inter se 
 
 Inter vivos 
 
 In toto 
 
 In transitu 
 
 Intra vires 
 
 Ipse dixit 
 
 Ipso facto 
 
 Ipso jure 
 
 Jeofail 
 
 Jurat 
 
 Jus 
 
 Jus ad rem 
 Jus civile 
 Laches 
 Lex loci 
 
 In person. 
 
 In the matter of. 
 
 Against the thing. 
 
 As it was; in the same position. 
 
 Among other things. 
 
 Between other parties. 
 
 In the meantime. 
 
 Among themselves. 
 
 Between living persons. 
 
 All; entirely 
 
 In the course of transit. 
 
 Within the power. 
 
 He himself said it. 
 
 By the act itself. 
 
 By the law itself. 
 
 An error or mistake; an oversight in 
 pleading. 
 
 That part of an affidavit or other docu- 
 ment where an officer certifies that it 
 was sworn before him. 
 
 Law; right; equity. 
 A right to a thing. 
 The civil law. 
 Negligence; delay. 
 The law of the place.
 
 2OO Latin Words and PHrases 
 
 Lex non scripta 
 Lex scripta 
 Lex talionis 
 Lex terras 
 Lis alibi pendens 
 Lis pendens 
 Locum tenens 
 Locus in quo 
 
 Locus sigilli (L. S.) 
 
 Magna Charta 
 
 Magnum bonum 
 Mai 
 
 Mala fides 
 Malum in se 
 Malum prohibitum 
 
 Mens sana in corpore 
 sano 
 
 Modo et forma 
 Modus operandi 
 Multum in parvo 
 Mutatis mutandis 
 
 The unwritten law. 
 
 Statute, or written, law. 
 
 The law of retaliation. 
 
 The law of the land. 
 
 A suit pending elsewhere. 
 
 A pending suit. 
 
 A proxy; a substitute, or deputy. 
 
 The place in which. (Where anything 
 is alleged to have been done.) 
 
 Place of the seal. (In deeds and other 
 documents the letters L. S. are 
 usually placed at the right of the 
 signature, indicating the place where 
 a small paper seal is to be attached.) 
 
 Great Charter. Specifically, the Great 
 Charter of English liberties forced 
 from King John by his barons. 
 
 A great good. 
 
 Evil; bad. 
 
 Bad faith. 
 
 Bad in itself. 
 
 An offense or evil prohibited by law. 
 
 A sound mind in a sound body. 
 
 In manner and form. 
 
 Manner of working. 
 
 Much in little. 
 
 Necessary changes being made.
 
 Latin Words and PHrases 201 
 
 Ne exeat 
 
 Ne plus ultra 
 Nihil debet 
 
 Nil 
 
 Nisi prius 
 
 Nolens volens 
 
 Nolle prosequi (nol/ 
 pros.) 
 
 Nolo contendere 
 Non assumpsit 
 
 Non compos mentis 
 Non constat 
 Non est 
 
 Non prosequitur (non 
 pros.) 
 
 Non sequitur 
 
 Non vult contendere 
 
 (Let him not depart.) A writ issued to 
 prevent a debtor or other person from 
 leaving the state. 
 
 Nothing beyond. 
 
 (He owes nothing.) A plea denying a 
 debt. 
 
 Nothing. 
 
 A term applied to those courts which try 
 civil causes with the aid of a jury. 
 
 Willing or unwilling. 
 
 Not willing to prosecute. 
 
 "I will not contest." An implied con- 
 fession of guilt in a criminal action. 
 
 (He did not undertake or assume.) A 
 denial of obligations sought to be 
 enforced by the suit. 
 
 Not of sound mind. 
 It does not appear. 
 Not in being; not to be found. 
 
 (He does not prosecute.) When the 
 plaintiff abandons his suit the defen- 
 dant enters a non pros, and obtains 
 costs against the plaintiff. 
 
 It does not follow; an unwarranted 
 conclusion. 
 
 He (the defendant in a criminal case) 
 will not contest it. A plea equivalent 
 to that of guilty. Sometimes abbre- 
 viated "non vult."
 
 2O2 Latin Words and Phrases 
 
 Nota bene (N. B.) 
 Nudum pactum 
 Nulla bona 
 
 Nunc pro tune 
 
 Obiter dictum 
 
 Onus 
 
 Onus probandi 
 
 Pan delicto 
 
 Pari materia 
 
 Pan passu 
 
 Parol 
 
 Particeps criminis 
 
 Passim 
 
 Pendente lite 
 
 Per 
 
 Per annum 
 
 Per capita 
 
 Per centum 
 
 Per contra 
 
 Per curiam 
 
 Note well; take notice. 
 
 A contract without a consideration. 
 
 No goods. A return made by a sheriff 
 that he has found no goods on which 
 to levy. 
 
 Now for then. A phrase used to 
 express that a thing is done at one 
 time which should have been done at 
 another. 
 
 (Said by the way.) An incidental opin- 
 ion expressed by a judge, but which 
 has not the force of an adjudication. 
 
 A burden. 
 
 The burden of proving. 
 
 Equal in guilt. 
 
 On the same subject. 
 
 With equal pace; by the same gradation. 
 
 Word; verbal. 
 
 Partner in crime. 
 
 Here and there. 
 
 While litigation continues. 
 
 By; through. 
 
 By the year. 
 
 By the head; share and share alike. 
 
 By the hundred. 
 
 On the contrary. 
 
 By the court.
 
 Latin Words and PHrases 203 
 
 Per diem 
 Per se 
 Persona grata 
 
 Persona non grata 
 Per stirpes 
 
 Posse comitatus 
 
 Post meridiem (P.M. 
 Post mortem 
 Post scriptum 
 Prima facie 
 Pro bono publico 
 Pro confesso 
 Pro et con 
 Pro forma 
 Pro hac vice 
 Propria persona 
 Proprio vigore 
 Pro rata 
 Pro tanto 
 Pro tempore 
 
 By the day. 
 
 By itself or himself. 
 
 A diplomatic representative who is 
 acceptable to the government to 
 which he is accredited. 
 
 A diplomatic representative not accept- 
 able to the government to which he 
 is accredited. 
 
 According to the root or stock. De- 
 scendants take per stirpes when they 
 take the share which their parent 
 would have taken, if living. 
 
 The power of the county. Citizens 
 summoned to assist a sheriff. 
 
 ) After noon. 
 After death. 
 Written afterwards. 
 At first view. 
 For the public good. 
 As if conceded. 
 For and against. 
 As a matter of form. 
 For this occasion. 
 His own proper person. 
 Of (one's or its) own strength or vigor. 
 According to the rate or proportion. 
 For so much. 
 For the time being.
 
 204 Latin "Words and PHrases 
 
 Quare 
 
 Quantum meruit 
 Quasi 
 Quia timet 
 
 Why? For what reason? 
 As much as he deserved. 
 As if ; in a manner. 
 
 (Because he fears.) Applied to a bill 
 to prevent expected injury. 
 
 Quid pro quo (One thing for another.) A mutual 
 
 consideration. 
 
 Quoad hoc With respect to this; to this extent. 
 
 Quo jure By what right? 
 
 Quo warranto (By what authority?) A writ inquiring 
 
 by what warrant a person or corpora- 
 tion acts. 
 
 Remittitur 
 Res 
 
 Res gestae 
 
 Res judicata (or adjudi- 
 cata) 
 
 Retraxit 
 
 A sending back; a remission. 
 
 Things; includes real and personal 
 property. 
 
 Things done; the subject-matter. 
 
 Matters adjusted or decided. 
 
 (He has withdrawn.) The withdrawal 
 of a suit by a plaintiff. 
 
 Scienter 
 Scilicet (ss.) 
 Scire facias 
 
 Scire feci 
 
 Knowledge of the wrong. 
 Namely; to wit: 
 
 (Do you make known.) A writ founded 
 on some record and requiring a party 
 to show cause why another should not 
 have the benefit of the record. 
 
 (I have made known.) The return of 
 the sheriff or other officer to the writ 
 of scire facias.
 
 Latin Words and PHrases 205 
 
 Semper idem Always the same. 
 
 Sic So; thus. 
 
 Sine die Without a day being appointed. 
 
 Sine qua non An indispensable condition. 
 
 Stare decisis Abiding by, or adhering to, decided 
 
 cases. 
 
 Status quo (The state in which.) The existing 
 
 state of things at any given date. 
 
 Stet Let it stand. 
 
 Sub judice Under consideration. 
 
 Subpoena duces tecum A writ requiring a witness to attend and 
 bring certain documents. 
 
 Sui generis Of his or its own kind or class. 
 
 Sui juris Of his own right; possessing all the 
 
 rights to which a freeman is entitled. 
 
 Supersedeas A writ commanding a stay of proceed- 
 
 ings. 
 
 Supra Above. 
 
 Tempus fugit Time flies. 
 
 Ultima Thule Most distant land; farthest limit. 
 
 Ultra vires Beyond power. 
 
 Una voce With one voice. 
 
 Uno animo With one mind; unanimously. 
 
 Usus loquendi The usage of speech. 
 
 Vade mecum "Go with me." A thing carried as a 
 
 constant companion.
 
 206 Latin Words and PKrases 
 
 Vale 
 
 Veni, vidi, vici 
 
 Venire facias 
 
 Venue 
 
 Verbatim et literatim 
 
 Verbum sat sapienti 
 
 Versus 
 
 Via media 
 
 Vice versa 
 
 Vide 
 
 Videlicet, or scilicet 
 (viz., ss.) 
 
 Vincit que se vincit 
 Viva voce 
 Vox populi 
 
 Farewell. 
 
 "I came, I saw, I conquered." 
 
 The writ for summoning a jury. 
 
 Place of trial. 
 
 Word for word and letter for letter. 
 
 A word is enough for a wise man. 
 
 Against. 
 
 A middle course. 
 
 The terms being exchanged; the reverse. 
 
 See. 
 
 Namely; to wit. 
 
 He conquers who overcomes himself. 
 
 By the living voice; orally. 
 
 The voice of the people.
 
 THE CORRECT WORD. 
 
 The art of choosing quickly the right words to 
 express the thought and of putting them together with 
 reference to grammatical correctness and clearness, is 
 mastered only by study and practice. 
 
 The following list of words and phrases frequently 
 misused is by no means a complete one ; it is suggestive 
 merely, and every reader can easily increase it by 
 additions of his own. 
 
 Affect, effect. These words are not interchangeable. 
 Affect means to influence, to impress, to change. 
 Effect means to accomplish, to bring about, to achieve. 
 "Changes in temperature do not affect (change, 
 influence) this plant." "The tariff will effect (bring 
 about or accomplish) a reform." Affect is used only 
 as a verb. Effect is used both as a verb and a noun. 
 
 Agreeable, agreeably. The adverb agreeably is the 
 proper word to use in such construction as "Agreeably 
 to your request we send you four machines," "Agree- 
 ably to the order of the day the House took up the 
 report of the Committee. " 
 
 And, to. "Try to learn your lesson, " " Try to come 
 at five o'clock," not "Try and learn your lesson," 
 " Try and come at five o'clock. " 
 
 Any place, anywhere. " I cannot find it anywhere, " 
 not " I cannot find it any place. " 
 
 As as, so as. A s precedes as in the comparison of 
 207
 
 208 TKe Correct Word 
 
 equals. "This book is as large as that one." So 
 precedes as in the comparison of unequals, or where a 
 negative precedes. "This book is not so large as 
 that." 
 
 As, like. As is the correct word when a verb fol- 
 lows or is understood to follow. "She does not sing 
 as he does," not "like he does." "Be calm, as we 
 are," not "like we are." Where no verb is implied, 
 like may be used. "She does not look like him." 
 
 As long as, so long as. As long as is correct when 
 the extent or degree implied by the phrase is not 
 intended to be emphasized; so long as, when the extent 
 or degree implied is intended to be emphasized. 
 
 At, in. One arrives at a city or town, whether one 
 arrives by steamer, by train, on foot, on horseback, or 
 by any other method; one arrives upon the scene; a 
 vessel arrives in port. 
 
 At, to. "He has been at the theatre," not to the 
 theatre. 
 
 At, with. Not angry at, but angry with, is proper, 
 with reference to a person. One is angry with a 
 person, at or about a thing or an occurrence. 
 
 Avocation, vocation. Avocation means an occa- 
 sional diversion from regular business or vocation. 
 Vocation means regular, constant business or employ- 
 ment. The two words are not interchangeable. 
 
 Bad, badly. The expressions "I feel badly," "You 
 look nicely," are not correct according to the best 
 authorities. Here the words feel and look do not 
 refer to an action, but to the state, or condition, or 
 appearance of the person. Therefore the adjective 
 forms are required, and the proper expressions are 
 " I feel bad, " "You look nice. " If it is correct to say
 
 THe Correct Word 209 
 
 "I feel badly," then why not "I feel sadly" or "I 
 feel gladly"? See Century and Standard Diction- 
 aries, Maxwell's Grammar, "Correct English." 
 
 Badly used in the sense of very much, is recorded by 
 Standard Dictionary as colloquial and inelegant. "I 
 need it very badly" is equivalent to " I need it in a bad 
 manner." 
 
 Beside, besides. Not interchangeable. Beside 
 means close by, or near, and is not now used in the 
 sense of in addition to. Besides means in addition to. 
 "There were two beside him" means that there were 
 two by the side of him. "There were two besides 
 him" means that there were two in addition to him. 
 
 Between, among. Between applies to two; among 
 to more than two. 
 
 But that, but what. But in connection with that 
 is often redundant and should be omitted. "I have 
 no doubt but that he will come" should be " I have no 
 doubt that he will come. " But what is properly used 
 when the meaning is but that which. It is incorrect 
 in the expression " I don't know but what this book is 
 as good as that one." 
 
 By and by, by the by. We may write either by the 
 by or by the bye, but only by and by, never by and 
 bye. 
 
 Company. When meaning a business corporation 
 or association, singular number, requiring a singular 
 verb. 
 
 Compare to, compare with. One thing is compared 
 with another to note points of agreement or difference. 
 One thing is compared to another which it resembles. 
 Compare to implies likeness; compare with brings out 
 the respective merits of each thing. 
 
 14
 
 2io TKe Correct Word 
 
 Corporal, corporeal. Corporal means relating to 
 the body, as opposed to the mind ; as corporal punish- 
 ment. Corporeal means having a body; material; 
 opposed to immaterial or spiritual; as, "The corporeal 
 eye sees material things." 
 
 Corporation, incorporation. Both words mean "an 
 artificial body established by law for public or private 
 purposes. " Corporation is the word in general use to 
 designate such a body. 
 
 Cotemporary. Not so good usage as contemporary. 
 
 Customs. In the sense of a tariff, always used in 
 the plural; as, customs duty, customs authorities. 
 
 Depositary, depository. In the best usage, deposi- 
 tary denotes a person with whom, and depository 
 denotes a place in which, anything is deposited. 
 
 Differ from, differ with. Differ from expresses a 
 difference in quality or appearance; properly the cor- 
 relative of different from. Differ with expresses dis- 
 agreement, dispute or dissent; have a difference with. 
 Persons, things, and opinions differ from each other; 
 persons differ in opinion with each other. Standard 
 Dictionary gives this illustrative sentence; "Washing- 
 ton differed from Hamilton in temperament, but he 
 did not differ with him in political theory. " 
 
 Distinctively, distinctly. Distinctively means "in a 
 way to distinguish one thing from others." Distinctly 
 means "plainly." 
 
 Each, every, require singular verbs. "Each of the 
 men was paid a dollar." "The words, . every one of 
 which was in print before I used it, are these." 
 
 Elder, eldest. Apply to persons only, and are
 
 The Correct Word 211 
 
 limited to members of the same family. When the 
 comparative than is used, older, and not elder, is 
 required; as, "James is the elder of the two boys"; 
 but, "James is older than John." Older and oldest 
 apply to both persons and things. 
 
 Else. Should be followed by than, not by but; as, 
 "No one else than John came," not, "No one else but 
 John came." 
 
 Emigrant, immigrant. Not interchangeable. Emi- 
 grant means a person moving away from a country. 
 An immigrant moves into the country where he takes 
 up his abode. 
 
 Employee. This word is now fully Anglicized, 
 spelled with ee, pronounced as an English word, and is 
 applicable to either sex. 
 
 Etc., &c. These terms may be used interchange- 
 ably to indicate "and other things," "and the rest," 
 "and so forth." 
 
 Expect. Often misused in the place of suppose. 
 We expect that which is to come, not that which has 
 happened. Therefore, "I suppose John went to New 
 York yesterday," not "I expect John went to New 
 York yesterday." 
 
 Farther, further. Farther refers to distance, fur- 
 ther to that which is more, or additional; as, "The 
 eagle flies farther than the sparrow." "He said 
 nothing further." 
 
 Few, less. Few refers to number, less to quantity. 
 "No man had fewer friends" (not less friends). 
 
 First two, two first. First two is correct whenever 
 the two form a first pair of objects, corresponding to 
 or distinct from a last pair. Two first is correct when 
 reference is made to two objects each of which is at the
 
 212 TKe Correct Word 
 
 head of its own series, or both of which are foremost 
 in the same class not divided into pairs. 
 
 Had better, had rather. Forms disputed by some 
 critics, who say that would better and would rather 
 are the correct forms; others argue for equal rights 
 for had better and had rather. The forms would 
 better and would rather conform to the grammar of 
 the language, and in this have an advantage ; but had 
 better and had rather conform to the idiom of the 
 language and are sanctioned by good authorities the 
 dictionaries, the Bible, and other literary usage. 
 
 Half. A thing may be cut in halves, not in half. 
 Everything has two halves. 
 
 Hanged, hung. Criminals are hanged, pictures are 
 hung. 
 
 I, me. Which is correct: "You are taller than /," 
 or "You are taller than me"? The meaning is, You 
 are taller than I am tall. Omitting the last two words, 
 the sentence stands, "You are taller than 7." 
 
 "You like him better than me." The objective 
 form me is correct, as the object of the preposition 
 than. Supplying the omission, the sentence is "You 
 like him better than you like me." It is correct to 
 say, "You like him better than /," only when the 
 meaning is "You like him better than / like him." 
 
 If, whether. // is used to introduce a supposition, 
 whether, to introduce an alternative. The use of if 
 for whether is condemned except in poetic or collo- 
 quial language. The expressions, ' ' He asked if our com- 
 pany was incorporated," "I do not know ifhe will 
 come, " are not so good English as, " He asked whether
 
 THe Correct Word 213 
 
 our company was incorporated," "I do not know 
 whether he will come." 
 
 In, into. In denotes position, state; as, "They 
 kept in line." Into denotes direction, destination; 
 as, "Go into the house." 
 
 In, to. "I have been in New York," not to New 
 York. In indicates within the limits of; to indicates 
 motion towards. 
 
 Lay, lie. The principal parts of these verbs are: 
 lay, laid, laid; lie, lay, lain. Lie is intransitive and 
 does not require an object. Lay is transitive and has 
 an object. One lies down to sleep; one lays a book 
 on the table. " I lay awake last night, " not, " I laid 
 awake last night"; but, "I laid a book on the table." 
 
 Lengthways, lengthwise. Lengthwise, endwise, 
 sidewise, etc., are preferable to lengthways 1 , endways, 
 sideways. 
 
 Liable, likely. Liable implies obligation, respon- 
 sible, and refers to an unfavorable event. Likely 
 implies probability, inclination. "We are likely (not 
 liable) to accept favors as our just dues. " "A surety 
 is liable for the debt of his principal. " 
 
 ly (when to add it). Agreeable, previous, and such 
 words should not be used as adverbs. Not previous 
 to, but previously to; not agreeable to your letter, but 
 agreeably to your letter, comformably to your orders, 
 etc. 
 
 Myself. Myself, himself, themselves, etc., are prop- 
 erly used only in an emphatic or a reflexive sense; 
 reflexive sense meaning an object signifying the same 
 person as the subject. Not, "He met James and my' 
 self, " but, "He met James and me. "
 
 214 THe Correct Word 
 
 Near. Should not be used in the sense of nearly. 
 " It is not nearly so large as this, " not, " It is not near 
 so large as this." 
 
 Neither nor. When a 'subject consists of two or 
 more singular nouns or phrases disjoined by neither- 
 nor or either-or, the verb should be singular; as, 
 "Neither John nor James is going." 
 
 None, while properly meaning no one, not one, is 
 construed in the singular or plural as the sense, or the 
 best expression of the meaning intended, may require; 
 as, "None of these bills are now in circulation"; 
 "None of these things move me"; "None but the 
 brave deserves the fair. " 
 
 Nor. Whether to use or or nor after no or not is 
 often a puzzling question. Pairs of words meaning 
 the same thing require or; as, "He has no money or 
 credit." Here "credit" is made a mere equivalent 
 of money and amplifies the expression. ' ' He has no 
 money nor credit " presents " credit " as an alternative, 
 an additional resource. 
 
 Number. When the word number is used to 
 express a unit of some sort, it is singular; as, "The 
 number of men was small." "The number of mem- 
 bers is increasing." Used in the sense of several, it 
 is plural; as, "A large number of men speak in favor 
 of single tax. " 
 
 On, upon. Interchangeable in some instances. On 
 is preferable when merely rest or support is indicated ; 
 upon, when motion into position is involved. When 
 upon means up and on, that is, ascent into position, 
 it is written as two words; as, "Let us go up on the 
 roof." 
 
 Only. The most carelessly used word in the
 
 The Correct Word 215 
 
 language. To avoid ambiguity, only should be placed 
 next to the word or phrase to be qualified; as, 
 
 "He only saw the prisoner" (did not speak to him). 
 
 "He saw only the prisoner" (saw no one else). 
 
 " Only he saw the prisoner" (no one else saw him). 
 
 "He saw the prisoner only" (saw no one else). 
 
 Ought, should. Ought expresses moral obligation. 
 "You ought to pay your debts." Should expresses 
 propriety or expediency. "You should not go out in 
 the storm." 
 
 Per. Critics say that the proper use of per is only 
 in connection with other Latin words; but business 
 usage has established the word in such expressions as 
 "per day," "per invoice," "per steamship 'Star." 
 
 People, persons. Persons is the proper word to 
 designate a small number of individuals. "Three 
 persons entered the room." People indicates a 
 crowd or a large number. 
 
 Personality, personalty. Personality means the 
 attributes that make up the character of an individual. 
 "He is a man of pleasing personality. " Personalty is 
 a legal term signifying personal property as distin- 
 guished from real property; as, "His real estate was 
 valuable, his personalty was insignificant. " 
 
 Practicable, practical. Practical is used of persons 
 who show skill, practice, knowledge or experience; as, 
 "a practical printer." Used of a thing, practical 
 means useful, opposed to theoretical; as, "man's 
 practical understanding." Practicable is not used of 
 persons, but of things, and means capable of being put 
 into practice; as, "Deeming the plan practicable, we 
 attempted to carry it out. " 
 
 Principal, principle. The difference in the meaning
 
 216 THe Correct Word 
 
 of these words is illustrated as follows: principal 
 (adjective) means highest in character, rank, or impor- 
 tance; as, the principal men of the city; principal 
 (noun) means a leader or chief; the employer of one 
 who acts as agent; a sum on which interest accrues; 
 as, the principal of a note. Principle is used only as a 
 noun, and means a rule of conduct, a general truth, 
 an opinion or belief; as, "He reasoned from false 
 principles." "The principles of geometry are not 
 generally understood. " 
 
 Provided, providing. The participle providing is 
 often erroneously used instead of the conjunction 
 provided. The correct usage is, "He will go provided 
 he has the money, " not "He will go providing he has 
 the money." 
 
 Raise, rear. Animals are raised; human beings are 
 brought up or reared. 
 
 Rise, arise. Rise means to move upward; arise, to 
 begin existence, to appear. Literal meanings have 
 become associated with rise; figurative meanings with 
 arise; as, " The smoke rises. " " New questions arise. ' ' 
 
 Set, sit. Hens do not "set," they "sit." One 
 may set a hen on eggs, just as one may set a cup on the 
 table; but the hen and the cup sit. "The girl sits, " 
 "The hen sits," "The coat sits well," are the correct 
 expressions. 
 
 Shall, will. Shall in the first person and will in the 
 second and third denote simple futurity. Will in the 
 first person and shall in the second and third denote 
 determination. "I shall be pleased to go" is the 
 correct form, not "I will be pleased to go." One is 
 happy, delighted, pleased, or displeased, because the
 
 THe Correct Word 217 
 
 condition is beyond the control of the will; hence 
 shall is the proper auxiliary. Should and would fol- 
 low the usage of shall and will. 
 
 Sirname. The correct word is surname. 
 
 Some. Often erroneously used for somewhat. "This 
 book is somewhat larger than that" (not some larger). 
 
 Some place. Erroneously used for somewhere. 
 "Let us go somewhere," not "Let us go some 
 place." 
 
 Summonsed. Summons is the noun, summon and 
 summoned the verbs. Standard Dictionary says that 
 summons as a verb and its past tense, summonsed, are 
 useless colloquialisms for summon and summoned, 
 which are the established words in legal and literary 
 usage. 
 
 These kind, those sort. Standard Dictionary says 
 these expressions are an inexcusable vulgarism. Kind, 
 a singular noun, requires a singular adjective. The 
 correct form is "this kind of apple," ''these kinds of 
 apples," ''this sort of book, "those kinds of books." 
 
 Through. Not correctly used in the sense of 
 finished. Not " He is through speaking," but "He has 
 finished speaking." 
 
 Till, until. These words are interchangeable when 
 the meaning is to the time of. 
 
 To-day, to-morrow, to-night. Today, tomorrow, 
 tonight. Both forms are in current use, but that in 
 which the hyphen is used is given preference in Cen- 
 tury and Standard Dictionaries. 
 
 Toward, towards. Interchangeable, but Standard 
 gives preference to the first form. 
 
 Transpire. Not correctly used in the sense of 
 occur or happen.
 
 218 The Correct Word 
 
 Was, were. Were, not was, is required after as if, 
 as though, or wish. "He looked as if he were flying," 
 not "He looked as if he was flying. " "I wish I were 
 a sailor." 
 
 Whether. May be used to introduce a single 
 alternative, the second alternative, introduced by or, 
 being implied; as, "I do not know whether I shall go " 
 ("or not" being understood). 
 
 Whoever, whomever. When the pronoun is at the 
 same time the subject of a clause and the object of a 
 verb, it should be put in the nominative case, its 
 position as the subject being more important than its 
 position as the object of the verb; as, "He decided to 
 employ whoever applied before nine o'clock." 
 
 Without. Should not be used in the sense of 
 unless. "He said he would not come unless (not 
 without) I sent for him. " 
 
 USELESS WORDS. 
 
 The English language could be simplified and 
 improved by the separation of certain couples and 
 groups of words too frequently bound together in 
 unnecessary and inharmonious relations by careless 
 or undiscerning speakers and writers. In the hurry 
 of speech it is easy to err, but in writing one can 
 certainly use care. 
 
 This list of such groups is not complete. It is only 
 a reminder. The discriminating will add to it. 
 
 Accept of. Omit of. 
 
 Ate up. Leave out up. One really eats downward. 
 Better than you think for. Omit for. 
 Both alike. Not "they are both alike," but "they 
 are alike. "
 
 The Correct Word 219 
 
 Continue on. Omit on. 
 
 Equally as. "It is as large as this and equally as 
 broad. " Omit as after equally. 
 
 Every now and then. Omit every. 
 
 Every once in a while. Omit every. 
 
 Month of July. July is always a month. The 
 word "month" is not necessary to distinguish it. 
 Why not "the day of Tuesday"? 
 
 New beginner. Omit new. Every beginner is new 
 in his work. 
 
 Off of. Standard grammars say the use of these 
 two words together is "extremely inelegant." 
 Say, "Cut a yard off the piece. " 
 
 Other alternative. Leave out other in such expres- 
 sions as "There is no other alternative. " Alterna- 
 tive refers to two things. Alter means other. 
 "There is no alternative" is the correct expres- 
 sion. 
 
 Returned back. Omit back. 
 
 Rose up. Omit up. Rose or arose alone is suffi- 
 cient to indicate the upward direction. Nothing 
 rises down. 
 
 Taste of, feel of, smell of. Omit of. "Taste 
 the onion" and "Taste of the onion"; "Smell 
 the rose" and "Smell of the rose" have very 
 different meanings. 
 
 Where are you going to? Omit to. 
 
 Widow woman. Omit woman. Widow is suffi- 
 cient; the word does not refer to men.
 
 "INDEX EXPURGATORIUS." 
 
 It is said that, years ago, William Cullen Bryant, 
 then editor of a New York newspaper, framed an 
 "Index Expurgatorius " for the guidance of reporters, 
 in which were included some of the following words 
 and phrases, the use of which he considered beneath 
 the dignity of a first-class newspaper. That journal 
 is still famous for the elegance of its diction. 
 
 It would be well for every secretary, amanuensis, 
 and stenographer to commit to memory the following 
 "Index Expurgatorius" and to add to it from time to 
 time such other expressions as deserve expulsion from 
 the "Society of Correct English." 
 
 Above statement, or it appears from the above. 
 
 "The foregoing" or "preceding statement" or para- 
 graph is preferable. 
 
 Aggravate. Not to be used in the sense of provoke 
 or exasperate. Aggravate properly means "to make 
 heavier." 
 
 Agriculturalist. The correct word is agriculturist. 
 
 All over. Not to be used in the sense of over all. 
 Not "all over the country," but "over all the coun- 
 try." 
 
 Anybody's else. The correct form is anybody else's. 
 Both Standard and Century Dictionaries are authority 
 for this latter form. The phrases anybody else, some- 
 
 220
 
 "Index Expurgatorius ** 221 
 
 body else, nobody else, etc., have a unitary meaning, as 
 if one word, and properly take a possessive case (with 
 the suffix at the end of the phrase) : as, this is some- 
 body else's hat; nobody else's children act so. 
 
 At twenty minutes to three. At twenty minutes of 
 three is the correct expression. The idea to be con- 
 veyed is that it lacks twenty minutes of being three 
 o'clock. Century gives the following example under 
 "obsolete, provincial or colloquial uses": "At twenty 
 minutes to three, Her Majesty entered the House." 
 
 Balance. Not to be used for remainder. Standard 
 says these expressions, "the balance of one's dinner, " 
 "the balance of the evening," are objectionable 
 colloquialisms. Say "the rest" or "the remainder." 
 
 Between you and I. Both of the pronouns in this 
 phrase must be in the objective case objects of the 
 preposition "between;" therefore, "between you and 
 me. 1 ' 
 
 Bursted. A false formation. The imperfect and 
 past participle of "burst" are the same as the present. 
 ' ' The gun burst. " " The bubble has burst. ' ' 
 
 Can. Not to be used in the sense of may. Can 
 always refers to some form of possibility. " Can I use 
 your ruler?" means, Am I able to use it? "May I 
 use your ruler?" means, Have I permission to use it? 
 
 Demean. Not to be used in the sense of degrade. 
 Demean means to behave or conduct (oneself). 
 
 Died from, died with. A person dies of a fever, not 
 from or with a fever. 
 
 Different to, different than. Different from is the 
 only correct usage. (Standard.)
 
 222 " Index E-xpurgatorius " 
 
 Doctress. This word is not now used to distinguish 
 a woman physician; poetess, authoress and editress are 
 almost obsolete, the forms doctor, poet, author and 
 editor being preferred. 
 
 Don't. Not to be used as the predicate of a noun 
 singular. Don't is a contraction of do not, which is 
 plural. " He does n't, " "they don't, " are the proper 
 forms. 
 
 Enthuse. An ill-formed word; a vulgarism. (Stand- 
 ard.) 
 
 Every. Not to be used for entire or all; as, " I have 
 every confidence in him." Say "I have entire confi- 
 dence in him. " 
 
 Fix. In the sense of repair, or adjust, a collo- 
 quialism. 
 
 Foot. Not to be used in the sense of pay; as, "He 
 will foot the bill. " A colloquialism. 
 
 Got. Not to be used to express mere possession; 
 as, "I have got a bill to collect." Got is to be used 
 only when there has been a getting. It is proper only 
 when gotten may be substituted for it; as, "The man 
 has got (gotten) the amount which he went out to 
 collect." 
 
 Healthy. Not to be used in describing climate, 
 food, etc. A person is healthy, the climate is health- 
 ful, and food is wholesome or the reverse. 
 
 Heighth. There is no such word, although it is 
 frequently heard. The proper word is height. " I do 
 not know the height of the tower."
 
 *' Index Expurgatorius " 223 
 
 If. Not to be used instead of whether in introducing 
 an indirect question or object clause; as, "Go and see 
 if (whether) the package has come." Standard says 
 this use can be sanctioned only in colloquial and 
 poetic language. 
 
 I meant to have gone. This expression and similar 
 ones " I should like to have gone, " " I meant to have 
 written," are common errors of educated persons. 
 The rule is, "When the infinitive verb refers to a 
 time coincident with or after that of the principal 
 verb, the present infinitive is used." The correct 
 form of the preceding expressions is, "I should have 
 liked to go," "I meant to write," and "I meant to 
 go. " The doubling of the past tenses with have and a 
 past participle is proper only when the completion of 
 the future act was intended before the occurrence of 
 something else; as, "I meant to have written before 
 you arrived. " 
 
 In our midst. The better expression is, "among 
 us;" or, if a more literal expression is desired, "in the 
 midst of us. " 
 
 Know as. Incorrectly used for "know that." 
 
 Lit. Incorrect usage for lighted. 
 
 Loan. Not to be used as a verb. It is colloquial 
 and not in good usage. "I will lend you money" is 
 the proper form. 
 
 Over-above. Not correct when the meaning is 
 more than, in referring to numbers; as, "More than 
 fifty (not over or above fifty) were present." 
 
 Party. Not to be used when one person is meant. 
 Party, meaning one person, is properly a legal term,
 
 224 " Index Expurgatorixis " 
 
 signifying one who participates in a lawsuit, contract 
 or transaction. "Party in the sense of person is now 
 only vulgar." Century. 
 
 Posted. Not good usage for well informed. 
 
 Quantity. Not properly used for number. Not "a 
 quantity of books, " but "a number of books." 
 
 Quite a number. It is meaningless. Several is the 
 proper and sufficient term. 
 
 Real. Not properly used for really. Not "real 
 good," but "really good." More correctly, "It is 
 very good." 
 
 Seldom or ever. A solecism. " Seldom, if ever, " or 
 "seldom or never" is the proper phrase. 
 
 Such a. Improperly used in the sense of so; as, "I 
 never have seen such a tall man. " Say " I never have 
 seen so tall a man. " 
 
 Such another. The coirect expression is "another 
 such. " 
 
 Suicided. There is no such word in good literary 
 usage. 
 
 Unbeknown. A provincialism. 
 Was taken ill. Say, "became ill." 
 
 Years of age. The correct expression is, "Ten 
 years old" or "aged ten years." 
 
 Xmas. Should not be used in place of "Christ- 
 mas. "
 
 TELEGRAMS. 
 
 The Western Union Telegraph Company and the 
 Commercial Cable Company furnish the following 
 regulations governing the counting and charging of 
 domestic Telegrams passing between points within the 
 United States and Canada, International Telegrams 
 between Mexico and the aforenamed countries, and 
 Cable messages between the Eastern and Western 
 Hemispheres. 
 
 Telegrams must be written upon the "form" or 
 "blank" prescribed by the Telegraph administration 
 for that purpose or must be attached to that form in 
 such a manner as to leave the printed caption in full 
 view above the message when written. 
 
 Registered Cable Code Addresses are not accepted 
 as sufficient address in Domestic telegrams. Full and 
 ample addresses must be furnished. 
 
 WORDS TO BE COUNTED AND CHARGED FOR. 
 
 The minimum charge is for ten words. An addi- 
 tional charge is made for each additional word. 
 
 The address (including a title following or preceding 
 the name) is free. 
 
 The signature is free, but a title in the signature is 
 charged for. 
 
 More than one signature appended to a telegram 
 will be charged for. only one signature being sent free. 
 is 225
 
 226 Telegrams 
 
 Messages are received and transmitted in various 
 languages, including English, French, German, Dutch, 
 Latin, Italian, Spanish and Portuguese. 
 
 Each and every word, exclusive of address and 
 signature, is counted and charged for. 
 
 Initial letters, surnames of persons, names of cities, 
 towns, villages, states, territories, and of the Canadian 
 Provinces, or abbreviations of such names, are each 
 counted and charged as one word. (For instance, the 
 name "East St. Louis" or "New Mexico" is one 
 word.) 
 
 'In order to shorten telegrams, initials of a long 
 name may be combined and used as one word, pro- 
 vided the word is pronounceable. (Example, Carl A. 
 Fenlon C. A. P. Caf.) 
 
 Names of countries or counties, though composed 
 of more than one word, are counted as one. 
 
 Abbreviations of weights and measures, figures, 
 decimal points, bars of division (such as the line in the 
 fraction ^), are each separately counted and charged 
 for as one word. 
 
 Compound words, with or without the hyphen, if 
 recognized as compounds in dictionaries, count as one 
 word. 
 
 Avoid dividing a word at the end of a line. 
 
 As punctuation-marks are neither counted nor sent 
 except on written instructions to send them, these 
 marks may be omitted, with the exception of the 
 period and interrogation-point. 
 
 But in important telegrams, where a direct quota- 
 tion is to be transmitted, the safest method is to name 
 the marks of punctuation, including the quotation- 
 marks, as in the following example :
 
 Telegrams 227 
 
 WILLIAM DAWSON, 
 San Francisco, Cal. 
 
 Insert m mortgage on page nine, end of first paragraph, these 
 words quote in case of default in payment of the bonds comma 
 or any coupon thereto belonging comma the trustee shall 
 retain possession of the property period end quote. 
 
 A. M. SMITH 
 
 Write all numbers in words. 
 
 Write the abbreviations F. 0. B.. C. O. D., etc., 
 fob, cod, etc. 
 
 Write signatures to telegrams on the typewriter. 
 
 The message: "Shipped you May loth C. 0. D. 
 1,000 Ibs. No. 3 cotton at #20.50" should be written: 
 "Shipped you May tenth cod one thousand pounds 
 number three cotton at twenty dollars fifty." 
 
 GROUPS OF LETTERS AND FIGURES. 
 
 Each letter and each figure of a group are counted 
 and charged for as one word. 
 
 In ordinal numbers the affixes st, d, nd, rd and th 
 are each counted as one word. 
 
 Groups of letters, when such groups do not form 
 dictionary words, are counted at the rate of five 
 letters, or fraction of five letters, to a word. When 
 groups are formed by combining dictionary words, 
 each dictionary word is counted as one word. 
 
 The following examples illustrate the application 
 of this rule: 
 
 Excursion (English dictionary) . I word 
 
 Nous arriverons dimanche (French " ) . 3 words 
 
 G.W.E.A. (Initials) ... 4 " 
 
 Van Dome (Surname) . . .1 word
 
 228 Telegrams 
 
 W. H. Brown, Jr. . . . . . . .4 words 
 
 East St. Louis (City) I word 
 
 New York (State) . . . . I " 
 
 District of Columbia (or D. C.) I " 
 
 Lbs. (Abbreviation of weight) . . I " 
 
 looooooo (Figures) ...... 8 words 
 
 Ten millions (Amount expressed in dictionary words) . 2 " 
 
 44.42 (Figures and decimal point) . . 5 ' 
 
 74% (Figures and bar of division) . . 5 " 
 
 A I (Letters and figures) . . . 2 " 
 
 loth (Ordinal number and affix) . . 3 " 
 
 No. l8sWest22dSt 9 " 
 
 Ababa (Artificial group 0*5 letters) . . . I word 
 
 Ccghxo ( " " of 6 " ) . .2 words 
 
 Dutimerodal( " " ofii " ) . . 3 " 
 
 Dothe (Improperly combined) . 2 " 
 
 Allright or alright ( " ) . 2 " 
 
 Havyu (Two dictionary words mutilated and 
 
 ir -.properly combined) . . 2 _" 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 .... I word 
 
 A.M. 
 
 . 
 
 P.M. 
 
 . . 
 
 F. O. B. 
 
 (or fob) . 
 
 C. O. D. 
 
 (or cod) . 
 
 C.I.F. 
 
 (or cif ) . 
 
 C.A.F. 
 
 (or caf ) . 
 
 O.K. 
 
 . . 
 
 Per cent 
 
 (or percent.) 
 
 It will be seen from the foregoing list that it is bet- 
 ter to spell the word " tenth " than to write it " I oth ; ' ' 
 to write "ten million" than to write "10,000,000;" 
 " ten degrees " rather than " 10 ; " " ten by twenty " 
 rather than " 10 x 20." 
 
 Night messages, written on night-message blanks, 
 are sent for about 15% less than day rates, are trans-
 
 Telegrams 229 
 
 mitted after six o'clock P.M., and not delivered before 
 eight A.M. the following morning. 
 
 "Night Letters" are received up to midnight and 
 transmitted for delivery on the morning of the next 
 ensuing business day at the following rates: the 
 standard day rate for 10 words is charged for 50 words 
 or less and of such standard day rate for 10 words 
 for each additional 10 words or less. 
 
 "Day Letters" (long telegrams) are received, sub- 
 ject to slight delays in transmission and delivery, at 
 the rate of one and one-half times the standard night- 
 letter rate for 50 words or less and of the initial rate 
 for such 50 words for each additional 10 words or 
 less. 
 
 At the option of the Telegraph Company, night 
 letters may be mailed and day letters telephoned, at 
 destination, to the addressee. 
 
 Code language is not permitted in day letters or 
 night letters. 
 
 CODE AND CIPHER TELEGRAMS. 
 
 In large offices the stenographer deciphers code 
 and cipher telegrams and puts them in proper and 
 readable form. The following is one method of doing 
 this: 
 
 Place the Code words in a column at the left margin 
 of the paper and follow each of the Code words at the 
 right with its translation, taken from the printed 
 Code book in use or whatever private Code is used. 
 Thus, a telegram reading " Bridge begabtheit delivered 
 earlier aliquibus ladle" is translated from the Code 
 thus:
 
 230 Telegrams 
 
 Copy of Telegram from Grinnell & Co., San Francisco. 
 Dated Dec. 24, 1910. 
 Rec'd Dec. 24, 1910. 
 John J. Simmons, 
 
 19 Broadway, New York. 
 Bridge Bridge 
 
 Begabtheit Proposal accepted 
 
 Delivered Delivered 
 
 Earlier Earlier 
 
 Aliquibus Details by letter 
 
 Ladle Can you make earlier 
 
 delivery? 
 
 If there is a word in the telegram for which no exact 
 equivalent is found in the Code, place it in the left- 
 hand column and immediately below it place the 
 nearest equivalent Code word, with an interrogation- 
 point after it and place the translation opposite the 
 Code word. 
 
 If there is a word in the telegram for which no 
 reasonable translation can be found in the Code, place 
 the word in the left-hand column with an interroga- 
 tion-point after it and put no word in the right-hand 
 column. 
 
 CABLE MESSAGES. 
 
 All words, except the date and name of office of 
 origin, are counted and charged for. 
 
 Name and address of receiver must contain at least 
 two words. 
 
 Sender is responsible for incorrect or insufficient 
 address. Corrections can be made only by another 
 message which must be paid for.
 
 Cable Messages 231 
 
 In messages in plain language the maximum length 
 of a chargeable word is 15 letters. Should a word 
 contain more than 15 letters, every 15, or fraction of 
 15, letters is counted as a word. 
 
 When the letters ch come together in a word they 
 are counted as one letter, except in code. 
 
 Code words must not exceed 10 letters. 
 
 Code language is composed of (a) real words not 
 forming comprehensible phrases and (b) combinations 
 of letters having the appearance of real words. 
 
 Real words may be in any of the following lan- 
 guages: English, French, German, Dutch, Italian, 
 Spanish, Portuguese or Latin. 
 
 Combinations of letters (within the limit of 10 
 letters) must be pronounceable according to one of the 
 above-named languages. 
 
 Combinations of letters not pronounceable are 
 counted at 5 letters to the word. 
 
 Commercial marks and abbreviations in current 
 use (as tmrl, cif, fga, sags, rsvp) are counted at 5 
 letters to the word. 
 
 Combinations or alterations of words contrary to 
 the usage of the language are counted as if they were 
 written in the usual manner. 
 
 Cipher messages may be composed wholly or partly 
 of figures, or of letters or groups of letters, or of a 
 combination of words and figures, or of words and 
 letters. Groups of figures are counted at the rate of 
 5 figures to a word, plus one word for any excess. 
 The same rule applies to groups of letters. But 
 figures and letters written in the same group must be 
 counted separately. 
 
 Plain words inserted in code messages are counted 
 at 10 letters to the word.
 
 232 Cable Messages 
 
 Surnames of one person, names of ships, of towns 
 and countries, of places, squares, streets and other 
 public places; whole numbers, fractions, decimal or 
 fractional numbers written entirely in letters and 
 compound words can be grouped as one word each. 
 They are counted at the 10 or 15 letter limit. 
 
 Words joined by a hyphen or separated by an 
 apostrophe are counted as so many separate words. 
 
 The following are counted as a word: Each initial 
 to a personal name ; each separate letter ; each separate 
 figure; each supplementary instruction, such as =R. 
 P. 15= ; an underline ; parentheses ; quotation-marks. 
 
 Signs of punctuation, hyphens and apostrophes are 
 not counted or transmitted. 
 
 Decimal points, commas, bars and dashes used in 
 the formation of numbers and bars of division, are 
 each counted as a figure. 
 
 Letters added to figures to torm ordinal numbers, 
 or to designate the number of a house in an address, 
 are each counted as a figure in the group in which they 
 occur; thus i2Qth (5 figures), I word; 195 A (4 figures), 
 i word. 
 
 The following examples illustrate the application 
 of the rules in plain messages. 
 
 In the Address In the Text. 
 
 New York I word 2 words 
 
 Newyork I " I word 
 
 Hydepark Square 2 words 2 words 
 
 Hydeparksquare 2 " 2 " 
 
 Saint James Street 3 " 3 " 
 
 Saintjamesstreet 2 " 2 " 
 
 Ruedelapaix 2 " 2 " 
 
 Princeof wales (Ship, 13 letters) .... I word 
 
 44 Yz (5 characters) I "
 
 Cable Messages 233 
 
 444-55 (6 characters) 2 words 
 
 i 2 " 
 
 14x14 3 " 
 
 I7th i word 
 
 2%.. I " 
 
 Two hundred and thirty-four 5 words 
 
 Twohundredandthirtyfour (23 letters) 2 " 
 
 Elevenandahalf I word 
 
 2 words
 
 GENERAL POSTAL INFORMATION. 
 
 The following information regarding the mailing of 
 ordinary matter is furnished by the Post-Office 
 Department. More detailed information may be 
 obtained from a printed pamphlet issued by the 
 Department and furnished free by it on application. 
 
 Domestic mail matter includes matter deposited 
 in the mails for local delivery, or for transmission 
 from one place to another within the United States, or 
 to or from or between the possessions of the United 
 States. 
 
 Porto Rico and Hawaii are included in the term 
 " United States. " The Philippine Archipelago, Guam, 
 Tutuila (including all adjacent islands of the Samoan 
 group which are possessions of the United States), and 
 the Canal Zone are included in the term "Possessions 
 of the United States." The term, "Canal Zone" 
 includes all the territory purchased from the Republic 
 of Panama, embracing the "Canal Zone" proper and 
 the islands in the Bay of Panama named Perico, Naos, 
 Culebra, and Flamenco. 
 
 Domestic rates of postage apply to mail matter sent 
 from the United States to Canada, Cuba, Mexico, the 
 Republic of Panama, and the United States postal 
 agency at Shanghai, China, and matter addressed to 
 officers or members of the crew of vessels of war of the 
 United States. 
 
 234
 
 General Postal Information 235 
 
 RATES OF POSTAGE ON DOMESTIC MAIL MATTER. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. Includes: Letters, United States postal cards, 
 private post cards, all matter sealed or closed against in- 
 spection, all matter wholly or partly in writing, sealed or 
 unsealed, typewriting and letter-press copies thereof. 
 
 Rate: 2 cents for each ounce or fraction thereof. Postal 
 cards and post cards, i cent each. Prepayment of at least 
 one full rate (2 cents) required, except a letter bearing only 
 a special delivery stamp. Unpaid postage collected on 
 delivery at single rates. Limit of weight, 4 pounds. 
 
 SECOND CLASS. (Unsealed.) Includes: Newspapers and 
 periodicals (complete copies; partial or incomplete copies 
 are third-class matter). 
 
 Rate: I cent for each 4 ounces or fraction thereof, when 
 mailed by the public. Rates to publishers one cent a pound. 
 Full prepayment required. No limit of weight. 
 
 THIRD CLASS. (Unsealed.) Includes: Circulars, Photo- 
 graphs, Blue Prints, Press Clippings, and a great variety of 
 other "printed matter"; proof sheets, corrected proof sheets 
 accompanied by manuscript, and matter in raised characters 
 used by the blind. 
 
 Rate: i cent for each 2 ounces or fraction thereof. Full 
 prepayment required. Limit of weight, 4 pounds. 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. (Unsealed.) Parcel Post. Includes: 
 Books and all other matter, including farm and factory 
 products, not included in the first, second, or third class, 
 which is not greater in size than 72 inches in length and girth 
 combined, nor in form or kind likely to injure the person 
 of any postal employee or damage the mail equipment, and 
 not of a character perishable within a period reasonably 
 required for transportation and delivery. The limit of 
 weight for parcels intended for delivery at other post-offices 
 within the first and second zones is fifty pounds; for parcels 
 in other than the first and second zones is twenty pounds. 
 
 Rates: Parcels (except those containing books) weighing 
 four ounces or less are mailable at the rate of one cent for 
 each ounce or fraction of an ounce regardless of distance. 
 Parcels weighing more than four ounces are mailable at the 
 pound rates shown in the table on the next page, a fraction 
 of a pound being considered a full pound. On packages of 
 books weighing 8 ounces or less the rate will be one cent for 
 each 2 ounces; on those weighing over 8 ounces the zone 
 rates will apply
 
 236 
 
 General Postal Information 
 
 Parcel Post Schedule of Zone Rates 
 
 Weight 
 
 Miles 
 not over 
 
 1st zone 
 
 2d 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 150 
 
 3d 
 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 300 
 
 4th 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 600 
 
 5th 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 1000 
 
 6th 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 1400 
 
 7th 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 1800 
 
 8th 
 zone 
 rate 
 over 
 1800 
 
 Local 
 rate 
 
 zone 
 rate 
 
 50 
 
 1 pound 
 2 pounds 
 3 pounds 
 4 pounds 
 5 pounds 
 6 pounds 
 7 pounds 
 8 pounds 
 9 pounds 
 10 pounds 
 11 pounds 
 12 pounds 
 13 pounds 
 14 pounds 
 15 pounds 
 16 pounds 
 17 pounds 
 18 pounds 
 19 pounds 
 20 pounds 
 21 pounds 
 22 pounds 
 23 pounds 
 24 pounds 
 25 pounds 
 26 pounds 
 27 pounds 
 28 pounds 
 29 pounds 
 30 pounds 
 31 pounds 
 32 pounds 
 33 pounds 
 34 pounds 
 35 pounds 
 36 pounds 
 37 pounds 
 38 pounds 
 39 pounds 
 40 pounds 
 41 pounds 
 42 pounds 
 43 pounds 
 44 pounds 
 45 pounds 
 46 pounds 
 47 pounds 
 48 pounds 
 49 pounds 
 50 pounds 
 
 $0.05 
 .06 
 .06 
 .07 
 .07 
 .08 
 .08 
 .09 
 .09 
 .10 
 .10 
 .11 
 .11 
 .12 
 .12 
 .13 
 .13 
 .14 
 .14 
 .15 
 .15 
 .16 
 .16 
 .17 
 .17 
 .18 
 .18 
 .19 
 .19 
 .20 
 .20 
 .21 
 .21 
 .22 
 .22 
 .23 
 .23 
 .24 
 .24 
 .25 
 .25 
 .26 
 .26 
 .27 
 .27 
 .28 
 .28 
 .29 
 .29 
 .30 
 
 10.05 
 .06 
 .07 
 .08 
 .09 
 .10 
 .11 
 .12 
 .13 
 .14 
 .15 
 .16 
 .17 
 .18 
 .19 
 .20 
 .21 
 .22 
 .23 
 .24 
 .25 
 .26 
 .27 
 .28 
 .29 
 .30 
 .31 
 .32 
 .33 
 .34 
 .35 
 .36 
 .37 
 .38 
 .39 
 .40 
 .41 
 .42 
 .43 
 .44 
 .45 
 .46 
 .47 
 .48 
 .49 
 .50 
 .51 
 .52 
 .53 
 .54 
 
 $0.05 
 .06 
 .07 
 .08 
 .09 
 .10 
 .11 
 .12 
 .13 
 .14 
 .15 
 .16 
 .17 
 .18 
 .19 
 .20 
 .21 
 .22 
 .23 
 .24 
 .25 
 .26 
 .27 
 .28 
 .29 
 .30 
 .31 
 .32 
 .33 
 .34 
 .35 
 .36 
 .37 
 .38 
 .39 
 .40 
 .41 
 .42 
 .43 
 .44 
 .45 
 .46 
 .47 
 .48 
 .49 
 .50 
 .51 
 .52 
 .53 
 .54 
 
 $0.06 
 .08 
 .10 
 .12 
 .14 
 .16 
 .18 
 .20 
 .22 
 .24 
 .26 
 .28 
 .30 
 .32 
 .34 
 .36 
 .38 
 .40 
 .42 
 .44 
 
 $0.07 
 .11 
 .15 
 .19 
 .23 
 .27 
 .31 
 .35 
 .39 
 .43 
 .47 
 .51 
 .55 
 .59 
 .63 
 .67 
 .71 
 .75 
 .79 
 .83 
 
 $0.08 
 .14 
 .20 
 .26 
 .32 
 .38 
 .44 
 .50 
 .56 
 .62 
 .68 
 .74 
 .80 
 .86 
 .92 
 .98 
 1.04 
 1.10 
 1.16 
 1.22 
 
 $0.09 
 .17 
 .25 
 .33 
 .41 
 .49 
 .57 
 .65 
 .73 
 .81 
 .89 
 .97 
 1.05 
 1.13 
 1.21 
 1.29 
 1.37 
 1.45 
 1.53 
 1.61 
 
 $0.11 
 .21 
 .31 
 .41 
 .51 
 .61 
 .71 
 .81 
 .91 
 1.01 
 1.11 
 1.21 
 1.31 
 1.41 
 1.51 
 1.61 
 1.71 
 1.81 
 1.91 
 2.01 
 
 $0.12 
 .24 
 .36 
 .48 
 .60 
 .72 
 .84 
 .96 
 1.08 
 1.20 
 1.32 
 1.44 
 1.56 
 1.68 
 1.80 
 1.92 
 2.04 
 2.16 
 2.28 
 .2.40 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 General Postal Information 237 
 
 RATES OF POSTAGE APPLICABLE TO FOREIGN 
 COUNTRIES. 
 
 Cents 
 
 Letters, for the first ounce or fraction of an ounce 5 
 
 And for each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce 3 
 
 Single postal cards (including souvenir cards), each 2 
 
 Double postal cards, each 4 
 
 Letters for Great Britain and Ireland, per ounce 2 
 
 Letters for Germany by steamers sailing for Germany direct 
 per ounce 2 
 
 Ordinary letters for any foreign country (except Canada, 
 Mexico, or the City of Shanghai, China) will be forwarded whether 
 any postage is prepaid on them or not. All other matter must be 
 prepaid at least partially. But on wholly unpaid letters and on 
 insufficiently paid articles of all kinds double the amount of the 
 deficient postage is collectible on delivery. 
 
 WRAPPING. 
 
 Second, Third and Fourth Class matter, when so wrapped that 
 it cannot be examined easily, or when containing writing not 
 authorized by law, is subject to first-class rates. 
 
 PERMISSIBLE ADDITIONS TO ADDRESS 
 
 SECOND-CLASS MATTER. On the wrapper or on the 
 matter itself, in addition to the name and address of the 
 addressee, there may be placed the name and address of the 
 sender, preceded by the word "from," the words "sample 
 copy," or "marked copy," and marks (but not words) to 
 call attention to any passage. Other writing will subject 
 the package to the first-class rate. 
 
 THIRD-CLASS MATTER. On the wrapper or on the matter 
 itself may be placed the name and address and occupation 
 of the sender, preceded by the word "from," written desig- 
 nation of contents, such as "printed matter," "photo," 
 and any other matter mailable as third class. 
 A card or envelope bearing the name and address of the sender 
 may be enclosed with, or a dedication or inscription not in 
 the nature of personal correspondence, and such expressions 
 as " My dear friend," " Yours truly," may be placed upon the 
 photograph or other third-class matter. But such words as 
 " Please send out," or " Post up," written upon the wrapper 
 will subject third-class mail to letter postage.
 
 238 General Postal Information 
 
 FOURTH-CLASS MATTER. On the wrapper or on the matter 
 itself must be placed the name and address of the sender, 
 preceded by the word "from"; any marks, numbers, names 
 or letters necessary for description, and any printed matter 
 not in the nature of personal correspondence, may be placed 
 on the inside. 
 
 The card of the sender may be enclosed bearing such inscrip- 
 tion as "Merry Christmas," "With best wishes," etc. 
 
 FORWARDING. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. Matter paid at first-class rates is forwarded 
 without a new prepayment of postage. Also, mail matter 
 of all classes addressed to persons in the service of the United 
 States whose change of address is caused by official orders 
 will be forwarded until it reaches the addressee without a 
 new prepayment of postage. 
 
 SECOND, THIRD and FOURTH CLASSES. A new pre- 
 payment on mail of any one of these three classes must be 
 made every time it is forwarded. 
 
 Mail matter of all kinds received from any foreign country 
 (including Canada, Mexico and Cuba and the Republic of 
 Panama) will be forwarded at request of addressee and (except 
 parcels-post packages) to any foreign country without additional 
 charge for postage. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS. 
 
 Letters and other first-class matter prepaid one full rate are 
 returnable to sender without additional postage. 
 
 Unclaimed letters bearing card of hotel, school, or other public 
 institution, will be returned thereto only upon request. 
 
 United States Government postal cards are entitled to all the 
 privileges of letters except that of return to sender when unde- 
 liverable. 
 
 Mail intended to be delivered through the general delivery 
 should be marked "General Delivery." 
 
 Mail addressed to persons in a city, but not to a street and 
 number, should be marked "Transient," or "General Delivery."
 
 General Postal Information 239 
 
 For enclosing any matter of a higher class in that of a lower 
 class, and depositing or causing the same to be deposited for con- 
 veyance by mail at a less rate than would be charged for both 
 such higher and lower class, the offender will be liable for every 
 such offense to a fine of $10. 
 
 Matter of a higher class enclosed with matter of a lower class 
 subjects the whole package to the higher rate. 
 
 United States postage stamps are good for postage in Guam, 
 Hawaii, Porto Rico, and Tutuila, but not in the Philippine Islands 
 or in the Panama " Canal Zone." Postage stamps of the Philip- 
 pine Islands or Canal Zone are not good for postage or redeemable 
 in the United States. 
 
 Stamps cut or otherwise severed from postal cards, embossed 
 United States stamped envelopes, or newspaper wrappers are 
 not redeemable or good for postage. 
 
 SPECIAL DELIVERY 
 
 Ten cents' worth of ordinary postage stamps in addition to 
 the lawful postage may be used in place of a special-delivery 
 stamp. In such case the words "Special Delivery" should be 
 written upon the envelope. 
 
 Special-delivery matter must be delivered on Sundays also 
 if post-office is open on Sundays. 
 
 Special-delivery matter may be forwarded, but is not entitled 
 to special delivery at the second office unless forwarded before 
 an attempt has been made to deliver at the original address. 
 
 REGISTERED MAIL 
 
 To insure special care in transmission and correct delivery, 
 valuable papers, letters or other articles should be registered. 
 
 Letters or packages containing first, second or third class mat- 
 ter only are accepted for registration. Those of the fourth class 
 (parcel post) are insured. (See below.) 
 
 The registry fee is 10 cents for each separate letter or parcel, 
 in addition to the postage, both to be fully prepaid with postage 
 stamps attached to the letter or parcel. Two or more letters or 
 parcels cannot be registered as a single piece unless enclosed in 
 one envelope or wrapper.
 
 240 General Postal Information 
 
 Any piece of first, second or third class matter may be regis- 
 tered at any post-office or station thereof, and by any rural 
 carrier. In residential districts of cities, letters and packages 
 of first-class matter that are not cumbersome on account of size, 
 shape, or weight can be registered by letter carriers at the house 
 door as safely as if taken to the post-office. 
 
 In order to have a letter or parcel registered, it must bear in 
 serviceable stamps the necessary postage and registry fee (or 
 money sufficient therefor must be handed to the carrier, if regis- 
 tration be by carrier), must be legibly and correctly addressed, 
 bear upon the envelope or wrapper the name and address of the 
 sender, and the envelope or wrapper must be of such strength 
 as safely to carry the contents in the mails without breaking 
 under ordinary conditions. It should be handed to the post- 
 master, clerk or carrier, who will give a registration receipt to 
 the sender. Letters or parcels intended to be sent in the regis- 
 tered mails should not be placed in street letter-boxes or in the 
 ordinary mail-drops at the post-office. 
 
 The sender of registered mail may reclaim or recall it at any 
 time before its delivery, by applying to the mailing postmaster. 
 
 In case of the loss of a registered article prepaid at the letter 
 rate of postage, mailed at and addressed to a post-office in the 
 United States, the sender is indemnified for its value up to fifty 
 dollars. 
 
 Parcels prepaid at the letter rate should be sealed. 
 
 INSURANCE OF PARCEL-POST PACKAGES. 
 
 Fourth-class matter (parcel-post packages) for domestic des- 
 tinations cannot be registered, but may be insured. Each 
 package is insured against loss in an amount equivalent to its 
 actual value, but not to exceed $25.00, on payment of a fee of 
 five cents, and in an amount equivalent to its actual value in 
 excess of $25.00, but not to exceed $50.00, on payment of a fee 
 of ten cents in stamps, such stamps to be affixed. The amount 
 of the insurance fee shall be placed on the receipt given the sender 
 and on the coupon retained at the mailing office. The insurance 
 covers loss or theft only, not damage or injury or the spoiling of 
 perishable articles.
 
 General Postal Information 241 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS PARCEL-POST INFORMATION 
 
 The sender of a parcel-post package on which the postage is 
 fully prepaid may have the price of the article and the charges 
 thereon collected from the addressee on payment of a fee of 10 
 cents in postage stamps affixed, provided the amount to be col- 
 lected does not exceed $100.00. Such a parcel will be insured 
 against loss without additional charge in an amount equivalent 
 to its actual value, but not to exceed $50.00. 
 
 Parcel-post packages weighing over four ounces must be mailed 
 at the General Post-Office or at a lettered or local named station 
 or branch post-office, or such numbered stations as have been 
 designated to receive parcel-post matter. Uninsured parcels 
 weighing Jour ounces or less may be mailed at any convenient 
 point. 
 
 Articles classified as third-class matter cannot be sent by parcel- 
 post. 
 
 A parcel-post package may be sent " Special Delivery," tinder 
 the same conditions as a letter. 
 
 Parcel-post packages for foreign points cannot be insured, but 
 may be registered. The registration fee is 10 cents in adddition 
 to the postage, which is 12 cents a pound. Foreign parcel-post 
 packages are subject to a number of special provisions according 
 to the country to which they are addressed.
 
 List of Signs and Abbreviations Used in Correcting Proof 
 
 D 
 O 
 
 j?6 <rr space out 
 
 ep# 
 
 A 
 
 **~or*f 
 X . 
 
 vlX 
 Stetj 
 
 <T 
 
 Tlotf 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 V 
 
 ^xx 
 
 vy 
 
 Z. c. 
 
 cop. 
 
 ital. 
 
 rom. 
 
 tr. 
 
 (dele) Take away. 
 
 Turn an inverted letter. 
 
 Indent. 
 
 Directs that space be taken out. 
 
 Indicates more space between -words or letters. 
 Equalize spacing. 
 
 Indicates an insertion. 
 
 Indicates less space between words or letters. 
 
 Indicates broken or imperfect type. 
 
 Indicates a space or " quadrat " which improperly appears. 
 
 Let it remain as set ; change made was wrong. 
 
 Make a new paragraph. 
 
 Run in "without paragraph. 
 
 Indicates that a word or line is to be moved towards the face 
 
 of the bracket, whichever way turned. 
 Insert a hyphen. 
 Insert a period. 
 
 Insert an apostrophe. 
 
 Use double quotation marks. 
 
 Use single quotation marks. 
 
 (lower case) Directs that a letter or word printed in capitals 
 be made small. 
 
 Use a capital letter. 
 Set in italics. 
 Set in roman type. 
 Transpose letters or words. 
 
 (wrong foot) Directs attention to a letter of a wrong size 01 
 style. 
 
 242
 
 List of Signs and Abbreviations 
 
 243 
 
 Qyorf 
 
 s. c. 
 
 centre 
 
 run in 
 
 overrun 
 
 lead or Id 
 
 white line 
 
 Query as to spelling or use of language. 
 
 Compare with copy. 
 
 Set in middle of line or page. 
 
 Set full line without break. 
 
 Carry forward to next line. 
 
 Insert a lead (a narrow strip of metal used for spacing between lines). 
 
 Leave a space between lines equal to a line of type. 
 
 Correct the alignment. 
 Straighten lines at margin.
 
 Specimen of Proof with Marks 
 
 CPRANKLIN AND MEREDITH. 
 ,i^lftereditb. came accordingly in the evening, 
 when we talked my affair over. He had con- 
 & .ceived a great rfgard for me, and was very un 
 ' willing that^ "^should Jeave^e^house -'while^e 
 01 remained in it,_ He dissuaded 'me from returning 
 / to my native country, which I began to think of; 
 he reminded me his creditors began to be uneasy ; 
 that he kept his shop miserably, sold often without 
 if profit for ready money/ and often trusted without 
 / trusted without keeping accounts ; that he must 
 * therefore fa.il, which would make a vacancy I might 
 profitj2_ I objected^^rny want of ready money^ 
 
 Qjetnen leT me knjw that his father had a high 
 opinion of me, and from some discourse that had 
 passed juween them he was sure he would advance 
 money to set us up if I would enter into partnership / A 
 with him. ^' MY time^says he, ^ill be out with 
 Keimer in the $pring; oy that time we may have 
 our presses and types in from London. I am sensi- 
 ble I am no workman ; if you like it your-ek^J-in the 
 ^ business shall be^et against the stock I furnish, and 
 
 him to abstain long from- dramdrinking, and he 
 hop'cl might break him ,of that wretched habit entirely 
 when we come to be so closely connected. I gave an 
 inventory. to- the father, who carried it to a merchant ; 
 the things were sent for, the secret was to be kept 
 till they should arrive, and in the mearQime I was 
 to get work, if I could, at the other printing-house. 
 ^But I found no vacancy, and so remained idle a few 
 Jlays, when Keimer, on a prospect of being employ^ 
 jecy to print some paper-money in jilew Jersey, -which 
 would require various types and cuts that I only 
 could supply, and apprehending Bradford might en. 
 gage me and get the job from him, sent me a very 
 civil message, that old fremds should not part for a 
 
 244
 
 Specimen of Proof witH MarKs 
 
 245 
 
 JK? 
 
 few words, the effect of sudden passion, and wishing 
 me to return. Meredith persuaded trie to comply, 
 as it would give more opportunity for his improve- 
 
 Iment under my daHy instructions ; so I returned, and 
 we went on than foj sonic, time Jbefore. The New 
 Jersey job was[cQnmved|;nJobtained)a 
 press for it, the first that had been seen in thejcountry. 
 I cut several ornaments and checks for thejbills. - 
 went Jtogether to Burlington, where I executed 
 whole to satisfaction ; and he received so large a sum 
 for the work, forty or fifty pounds, as tojbe enabled 
 thereby to keep his head much longer [above water 
 We continued there nearv|hnonths. 
 
 ^
 
 INDEX 
 
 Abbreviations, 116-126 
 
 Abbreviations universally 
 allowable, 116 
 
 by omission of one 
 
 letter, 117 
 
 of books of the Bible, 117 
 Christian names, 117 
 days, 118 
 
 geographical divi- 
 sions, 117 
 
 in telegrams, 226, 23 1 
 measures of distance, 
 time, capacity, 
 weight, 43, 226 
 months, 118 
 names of states, terri- 
 tories, 125, 126 
 points of compass, 117 
 points of time, 117 
 scholastic degrees, 1 16 
 titles, 63, 116 
 towns, 117 
 
 Commercial abbreviations, 
 signs, contractions, 118 
 Punctuation of abbrevia- 
 tions, 118 
 
 Accent, marks of, ill 
 Address, 2, 3, 4 
 additions to, 237 
 forms of 4, 5, 20-35 
 in letters to the President, 
 Congressmen, etc., 60-62 
 in letters to clergymen, 63-66 
 punctuation of, 4 
 registered, 225 
 Affidavit, 148 
 Answer, 143 
 
 Appellation of state or nation, 
 83 
 
 Apposition, nouns in, 88 
 Apostrophe, 105 
 Arabic notation, 46 
 Articles of Incorporation, 181, 
 
 182 
 Asterisk, in 
 
 Backing sheet, 159 
 
 Bills, 30 
 
 Binding legal papers, 160 
 
 Body of letter, 5-9 
 
 Bond, 170 
 
 Botanical names, 8 1 
 
 Box, the, 137, 139 
 
 Brace, no 
 
 Brackets, 103 
 
 Brief, 156-158 
 
 By and per in signature, 1 1 
 
 By-laws, 183 
 
 Cablegrams, 230-233 
 
 combinations of words in, 
 231 
 
 commas, decimal points, 232 
 
 commercial signs, 233 
 
 groups of figures, 231 
 
 groups of letters, 231 
 
 length of words, 231 
 
 punctuation, 232 
 
 two words written as one, 
 232-233 
 
 what words charged for, 230 
 Capitalization, 75-83 
 
 appellations of states and 
 nations, 83 
 
 compound titles, 78 
 
 courts, 8 1 
 
 days of week, 78 
 
 Deity, 76 
 
 247
 
 248 
 
 Index 
 
 Capitalization Continued 
 ex, prefixed to titles, 78 
 Fates, Furies, Graces, Muses, 
 
 79 
 
 for the sake of emphasis, 77 
 
 geographical lines of posi- 
 tion, 83 
 
 geographical names, 82 
 
 heathen divinity, 76 
 
 / and O, 79 
 
 months, 78 
 
 names indicating office, 80 
 
 names of political parties, 77 
 
 names of religious sects, 77 
 
 names from foreign lan- 
 guages, 82 
 
 numbered phrases, 79 
 
 official titles, 77 
 
 "oh" when not capitalized, 
 
 79 
 
 personification, 79 
 
 poetry, 76 
 
 proper adjectives, 79 
 
 proper nouns, 78 
 
 question, 75 
 
 quotation, 75 
 
 reports of committees, clubs, 
 etc., 80 
 
 Roman notation, 77 
 
 seasons, 78 
 
 sentence, 75 
 
 specific names, 83 
 
 state, territory, county, 82 
 
 tabulations, 79 
 
 "the" forming part of cor- 
 porate name, 78 
 
 titles of books, etc., 77 
 
 titles used alone, 78 
 
 toasts, 80 
 
 words denoting division of 
 
 time, epoch, etc., 81 
 Capitals of states and territo- 
 ries, 125 
 
 Captions, 137, 153, 154 
 Caret, no 
 
 Carrying over lines, 7 
 "Cent" sign, 38 
 Cipher telegrams, 229, 230 
 
 how to write translation, 230 
 Classified mail matter, 235, 238 
 Closing sentence, 8 
 
 Clubs, reports of, 80 
 Code and cipher telegrams, 229 
 Comma, uses of, 84-91 
 Commercial "and," 37 
 Commercial correspondence, 
 
 i-35 
 
 Committees, reports of, 80 
 Company of women, 32 
 Compass, points of, 71, 82, 117 
 Complaint, form of, 141 
 Compound modifier, 70 
 Compound words, 68-74 
 elimination of hyphen, 68 
 ellipsis and inversion, 69 
 formed of verb and adverb, 
 
 71 
 
 general principles, 68 
 
 modern usage, 68 
 
 numeral and noun, 70 
 
 possessive phrases, 70 
 
 prefixes and suffixes, 7174 
 
 rules for compounding, 69 
 
 two adjectives preceding 
 noun, 70 
 
 two nouns forming one name, 
 70 
 
 two numerals, 71 
 Conclusion, to a letter, 9 
 
 capitalization of, 10 
 
 models of, 10 
 
 titles in, II 
 
 Consolidation of captions, 155 
 Contractions, 116 
 Contractions commonly used, 
 
 124 
 
 Copying, 40 
 Correct Word, the, 207 
 Court Documents, 137-165 
 
 affidavit, 148 
 
 answer, 143 
 
 brief, 156 
 
 captions, 153, 154 
 
 complaint, 141 
 
 consolidated captions, 155 
 
 judgment, 145 
 
 minutes of hearing, 163 
 
 note of issue, 152 
 
 notice of motion, 144 
 
 order, 146 
 
 summons, 140 
 Court testimony, 162
 
 Index 
 
 249 
 
 Current Law Phrases, 186- 
 192 
 
 Dash, 103-105 
 
 Date line, 3 
 
 Day letter, 229 
 
 Degrees, scholastic, 59, 62, 63 
 
 Display headings, 181, 184 
 
 Ditto-mark, III 
 
 Division, sign of, 38 
 
 Domestic mail matter, 234 
 
 Double spacing, 6 
 
 Ellipsis, marks of, no 
 
 Envelopes, 13-16, 39 
 forms of address, 13, 1 6 
 punctuation of address, 4 
 putting in machine, 39 
 superscription, 13, 16, 39 
 
 Equality, sign of, 38 
 
 Exclamation-point, 99, 100 
 how to make, 38 
 
 Family names, 37, 82 
 
 plurals of, 58 
 Figures and signs, 46-50 
 
 Arabic and Roman numerals, 
 46 
 
 double numbers require hy- 
 phen, 48 
 
 fractions require hyphen, 48 
 
 fractions spelled, 48 
 
 hyphen between numbers, 48 
 
 methods of writing "cents," 
 48 
 
 names of streets, avenues, 
 etc., 47 
 
 not to begin sentences, 46 
 
 numbers spelled, 46 
 
 omission of punctuation, 49, 
 50 
 
 ordinal numbers, 48 
 
 points of time, 49 
 
 punctuation of numbers, 47, 
 
 49 
 
 series of numbers, 48 
 signs in statistical tables, 49 
 signs not used without 
 
 figures, 49 
 spacing signs and figures. 48, 
 
 49 
 
 statistical tables, etc., 49 
 whole number and fraction, 
 
 48 
 with the contraction "No.," 
 
 47 
 
 "x" instead of "by," 49 
 Fine for improper mailing, 239 
 Firm name, possessive form of, 
 
 52 
 
 Flagging, 44 
 Folding letters, 39 
 Foreign mail matter, 236 
 Foreign words, 37, 56, 58, 82 
 Forms for heading, 2, 3 
 Forwarding mail, 238 
 Fractions, 48, 49 
 
 General Postal Information 
 
 234^241 
 General Remarks, 36-39 
 
 addresses, 36 
 
 division of syllables, 36 
 
 envelopes, cards, etc., 39 
 
 folding, 39 
 
 foreign names, 37 
 
 "Gents.," "Mess.," 37 
 
 margins, 37 
 
 paragraphs, 37 
 
 postal cards, 39 
 
 signature lines, 37 
 
 spacing after punctuation, 38 
 
 symbols, how to make, 38 
 
 Hanging indention, 147 
 Heading, 1-3 
 
 forms of, 2 
 
 punctuation of, 3 
 Honorable, title of, 59 
 House number and street, 3, 15 
 Hyphen, 106 
 
 Indenting lines of address, 4 
 Indenting paragraphs, 5, 36 
 Indention, hanging, 147 
 "Index Expurgatorius, " 220 
 Initial letters in telegrams, 226 
 Initialing pages, 6 
 Inst., prox., ult., 7, 8 
 Interrogation-point, 98-99 
 Interrogatories, 161
 
 250 
 
 Index 
 
 Introduction, in letters, 3-5 
 
 indenting lines of, 4 
 
 in two lines, 4 
 
 models of, 4 
 
 position of, 4 
 
 punctuation of, 4 
 
 titles in, 60 
 Introduction, letters of, 17 
 
 Judgment, form of, 145 
 Jurat, 138, 199 
 
 Latin Words and Phrases, 192- 
 
 206 
 
 Law Phrases, 186-192 
 Legal Documents, 137-175 
 Legislative body, petition to, 
 
 10, 62 
 
 Letter-press Copying, 40 
 Letters, in general, 1-42 
 
 address of, 3-5 
 
 backing-sheet, 36 
 
 body of , 5-9 
 
 carrying over lines, 7 
 
 closing sentence, 8 
 
 complimentary close, titles 
 in, 9, II 
 
 conclusion of, 9 
 
 construction of, 41 
 
 copying, 40 
 
 date, position of, 2-3 
 
 dating pages, 6 
 
 delivery by messenger, 16 
 
 division of syllables, 36 
 
 enclosures, 8 
 
 envelopes, 13-17, 39 
 
 folding, 39 
 
 forms of, 20-31 
 
 half-sheet letters, 7 
 
 heading of, I 
 
 important parts of, I 
 
 initialing pages, 6 
 
 initials of stenographer, 6 
 
 inst., prox., ult., 7 
 
 introduction, 3 
 
 in third person, 42 
 
 lists of items, 7 
 
 margins, 5, 7, 36 
 
 "Messrs.," use of, 14 
 
 model forms, 20-31 
 
 notation of dictator, 6 
 
 note in third person, 42 
 numbering pages, 6 
 of introduction, 17 
 of recommendation, 18 
 paragraphing, 5, 36, 37 
 postscript, 8 
 protection of roller, 36 
 reply to note in third person, 
 
 42 
 
 return postage, 37 
 second and succeeding pages, 
 
 37 
 
 separation of topics, 37 
 signature lines, how to make, 
 
 .37 
 
 signatures, styles of, 12 
 of widow, 12 
 of women, 12 
 with title, 12 
 single-spaced matter, 6 
 space between sentences, 38 
 spacing for address, 4 
 spacing for letters, 6 
 spacing after punctuation - 
 
 marks, 38 
 
 subject, placing of, 6 
 superscription, 1316 
 titles, 9, 12 
 
 to department manager, 5 
 uniform paragraphs, 5 
 Letters of Introduction, 1 7 
 Letters of Recommendation, 
 
 18 
 
 Letters requiring return post- 
 age, 37 
 
 Letters to clergymen, 63-66 
 Letters to government officials, 
 
 60-62 
 
 Letters to Women, 31-35 
 address to company of 
 
 women, 32 
 to company of man and 
 
 woman, 34 
 to company of unmarried 
 
 women, 34 
 models of introduction, 32- 
 
 34 
 
 salutation, forms of, 34 
 to members of a religious 
 
 order, 35 
 to a physician, 35
 
 Index 
 
 251 
 
 Letters to Women Continued 
 to women with scholastic 
 
 degree, 35 
 use of husband's title, 31 
 
 Lines for signatures, 37 
 
 "Madam," use of, 31 
 Mail matter, 234 
 
 classified, 234-5 
 
 domestic, 234-5 
 
 fine for improper mailing, 
 
 239 
 
 foreign mail, 236 
 
 forwarding, 238 
 
 postage, 235-6 
 
 registered mail, 240 
 
 special delivery, 239 
 
 unclaimed, 238 
 
 wrapping, 236 
 Manifolding, 39 
 Mesdames, use of, 32 
 Messrs., use of, 14 
 Minutes of hearing, 162-5 
 Minutes of meeting, 184 
 Miss, use of, 34 
 Mister, use of , 14 
 Misused words, 207-224 
 Model forms for business 
 
 letters, 20-29 
 Model forms for legal papers, 
 
 139-185 
 affidavit, 148 
 answer, 143 
 
 articles of incorporation, 181 
 bond, 170 
 brief, 156 
 by-laws, 183 
 captions, i53-!55 
 complaint, 141 
 consolidated captions, 155 
 endorsement on back, 139 
 judgment, 145 
 minutes of hearing, 162 
 note of issue, 152 
 notice of motion, 144 
 notice of special meeting, 173 
 order, 146-147 
 power of attorney, 168 
 proxy, 171 
 verifications, 149-151 
 
 warranty deed, 174 
 wills, 176 
 
 Names, family, 37, 58, 82 
 Nicknames, 96 
 Night letters, 229 
 Night telegrams, 228 
 Nota bene, 202 
 Note of Issue, 152 
 Notes of invitation, 42 
 Notice of meeting, 173 
 Notice of motion, 144 
 Number, use of , 2 14 
 
 Official titles, 59 
 
 Orders, Special Term, 147 
 
 Ordinal numbers, 48 
 
 Paging, 6 
 
 Paper, for legal documents, 137 
 
 Paragraphs, 5, 7, 36, 37 
 
 Parenthesis, marks of, 101, 103 
 
 Parenthetical words, 87 
 
 Parts of a letter, i 
 
 Period, use of, 95-97 
 
 Petition, to legislative body, 10 
 
 Plurals, 54-58 
 
 common words, 54 
 
 composed of two nouns, 55 
 
 compound words, 55-56 
 
 family names, 58 
 
 foreign words, 56-58 
 
 irregular plurals, 56 
 
 nouns ending in ful, 56 
 
 nouns ending in man, 58 
 
 nouns used only in the 
 plural, 56 
 
 regular plurals, 54 
 
 same form for both singular 
 and plural, 56 
 
 words ending in o, 54 
 
 two forms of, 57 
 Poetry, 135 
 Points of the compass, 71, 82, 
 
 117 
 Possessive case, 51-53 
 
 abbreviations in, 53 
 
 apposition, nouns in, 52 
 
 compound nouns, 51 
 
 double possessive, 53 
 
 of firm name, 52
 
 252 
 
 Index 
 
 Possessive Case Continued 
 
 pronouns, 15 
 
 pronoun before verbal noun, 
 52 
 
 somebody else's some- 
 body's else, 52 
 
 when omission of s causes 
 ambiguity, 51 
 
 when possession is several, 
 not joint, 52 
 
 when 5 may be omitted, 51 
 Postal cards, 37, 39 
 
 gauging space in writing, 
 
 39 
 Postal information, 234 
 
 classified mail matter, 235 
 classified rates of postage, 
 
 235 . 
 domestic mail matter, 234 
 
 235 
 domestic rates of postage, 
 
 235 
 fine for improper mailing, 
 
 239 
 
 forwarding, 238 
 miscellaneous items, 238- 
 
 239 
 
 parcel-post zone rates, 236 
 parcel-post information, 240, 
 
 241 
 
 permissible additions to ad- 
 dress, 237 
 
 postage on letters, 239 
 prepayment on foreign mail, 
 
 237 
 prepayment when necessary, 
 
 235 
 
 rates to Great Britain and 
 Ireland, 237 
 
 rates to possessions of United 
 States, 234 
 
 registration, 239 
 
 returnable mail matter, 238 
 
 special delivery, 239 
 
 unclaimed letters, 238 
 
 wrapping of mail matter, 237 
 Postscript, 8 
 
 Pounds sterling, sign of, 38 
 Power of attorney, 168 
 Prefixes and suffixes, 71-74 
 Proofreading, 242 
 
 Proposals for contracts, 21-24 
 Proximo, use of, 7, 8 
 Proxy, 171 
 Punctuation, 84 
 
 apostrophe, 105-106 
 
 colon, 94-95 
 
 comma, 84 
 
 dash, 103-105 
 
 exclamation-point, 99 
 how made, 38 
 
 interrogation-point, 98 
 
 miscellaneous marks, 1 10-1 1 1 
 
 parenthesis, 101-103 
 
 period, 95-97 
 
 principal marks used in, 84- 
 no 
 
 quotation-marks, 106-110 
 
 semicolon, 92-94 
 Punctuation of address of 
 letter, 4 
 
 of body, 7, 8, 
 
 of heading, 3 
 
 of introduction, 4 
 
 Rates of postage, 235 
 Receipt, 31 
 Registered mail, 240 
 Riders, 44 
 
 Salutation, 3, 4 
 
 for firm of women, 34 
 
 forms of, 31-35 
 
 in letters to clergymen and 
 
 officials, 60-66 
 
 Scholastic degrees, 35, 59, 116 
 Second and succeeding pages, 6 
 Section-mark, no 
 Semicolon, 92^94 
 Sign of possession, 51 
 Signatures, to letters, II 
 
 lines for, 1 1 
 
 of women, 12 
 
 on legal papers, 11, 12 
 
 position of, 12 
 
 styles of, 12 
 
 titles in, u, 12, 225 
 Signatures, to telegrams, 225 
 Somebody else's somebody's 
 
 else, 52 
 
 Spacing after punctuation, 38 
 Spacing between sentences, 38 
 Special delivery letters, 239
 
 Index 
 
 253 
 
 Spelling rules tor, 127-134 
 
 able, Me, 132 
 
 ant, ent, 134 
 
 ei, ie, 133 
 
 en, in, 132 
 
 final e, 127 
 
 final ee, 128 
 
 ise, ize, 133 
 
 Statement of account, 2223 
 Subject of letters, 6 
 Substance of letters, 41 
 Suffixes, 71-74 
 
 Suggestions in general, 36-39 
 Summons, 140 
 Superscription, 13 
 
 abbreviations in, 14-16 
 
 capitalization of, 14 
 
 models of, 13-16 
 
 position of, 15 
 
 punctuation of, 15 
 
 titles in, 14, 15, 16 
 Syllabication, 112-115 
 Symbols, how made, 38 
 
 cent sign, 38 
 
 division, degree, equality, 38 
 
 pounds sterling, 38 
 
 Tabulations, 49, 50 
 Telegrams, 225-230 
 
 abbreviations in, 226-7-8 
 
 compound words in, 226 
 
 day letters, 229 
 
 examples illustrating rules, 
 228 
 
 figures in, 226 
 
 groups of letters, 227 
 
 how words counted and 
 
 charged, 225 
 initial letters, 226 
 night letters, 229 
 night messages, 228 
 punctuation-marks, 226 
 signatures, 225 
 titles, 225 
 
 Testimony, 162 
 
 Time-saving expedients, 43-44 
 no punctuation, 43 
 ordinal endings dropped, 43 
 symbols used, 44 
 
 Titles, 59 
 
 abbreviations of, 59, 62 
 classification of, 59 
 ecclesiastical titles, 63 
 heads of religious orders, 66 
 when not abbreviated, 59 
 
 Trial Term Order, 147 
 
 Unclaimed Letters, 238-239 
 Underline, in 
 Useless Words, 218 
 
 Venue, 138 
 
 Verification, forms of, 149-151 
 
 Warranty deed, form of, 174 
 
 Wills, 176 
 
 Wrapping mail matter, 236
 
 library 
 Cfraduate School of Business Administration 
 
 Uni ^rB" 4 -; r of California 
 Los Angeles 24, California 
 
 UNIVERSITY of CALIFORNIA 
 
 AT 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 LIBRARY
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000179638 2